JP2008073557A - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To generate a profit state by delaying later, without immediately generating the profit state, by temporarily storing the profit state such as a big win state and a probability variation state determined by internal lottery. <P>SOLUTION: When detecting a game ball by a special pattern starting means 24, when a lot-drawing means 85 determines so as to generate the profit state such as the big win state and the probability variation state by a profit state generating means 76, since the profit state is temporarily stored in a profit state storage means 66, its profit state is not immediately generated. When a releasing condition is achieved such as when elapsed time counted by an elapsed time timer mean 70 becomes elapsed time for releasing a storage state or when the number of balls shot which is counted by a number of balls shot counting means 71 reaches the number of balls shot for releasing the storage state, the profit state stored by a storage releasing means 67 is released, and is generated with a delay. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, or a sparrow ball machine, particularly when generating a profit state by an internal lottery, so that the profit state is temporarily accumulated, and when a release condition is established, The accumulated profit status is gradually released.

  Conventionally, in a pachinko machine which is a kind of ball game machine, in addition to a normal winning means, a normal symbol starting means (so-called gate means) and a special symbol starting means (so-called electric tulip), 1 Or, a normal symbol display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of normal symbols, a special symbol display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of special symbols, and a big prize opening means (opening and closing type prize means) called an attacker, etc. When the game ball launched into the game area of the game board wins the special symbol starting means, a plurality of special symbols on the special symbol display means change for a predetermined fluctuation time.

  At this time, if the result of the lottery at the time of winning the special symbol starting means of the game ball is a big win, the stop symbol after the change becomes a specific symbol mode (a so-called “777” or other big hit symbol mode) and a big prize is won. The mouth means repeats the opening / closing operation up to a set number of times (for example, 16 rounds) based on a predetermined condition, and a special game that is a profit state advantageous to the player is generated. In this case, during the opening of the big prize opening means, it becomes easy for a plurality of game balls to win the big prize opening means, and a great profit is returned to the player (see Patent Document 1).

In particular, when a probability variation type jackpot is won by internal lottery, a probability variation state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than usual after the set number of special games is completed. In this probability fluctuation state, it is easy to win a jackpot, so a state that is more advantageous to the player continues.
JP-A-11-188158 (page 5-6, FIGS. 6-8, 10)

As described above, the conventional ball game machine has a very orthodox gameability that immediately generates a jackpot state when winning a jackpot in the internal lottery. There is a lack of playability, which may reduce the enjoyment of the player. Moreover, since the special game state and the probability variation state are always performed continuously by winning the jackpot, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and lacks in the interest of the game.
An object of the present invention is to temporarily accumulate profit states such as jackpot states and probability fluctuation states determined by internal lottery so that they can be generated later without being generated immediately, etc. .

  According to a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a first ball game machine having a first start port, first display means for variably displaying a first symbol for a predetermined time based on detection of a game ball that has entered the first start port, and the first display unit. In a ball game machine equipped with profit state generating means for generating one or a plurality of types of profit states advantageous to a player when the stop symbol after change of the display means is in a special symbol form, a game is provided at the first start opening. A lottery means for drawing whether or not to generate a profit state on condition that the ball has won, and a profit for setting one or more types of profit state flags for storing the profit state generated by the profit state generating means Profit state storage means for temporarily storing a profit state without immediately generating a profit state by the profit state generating means when generating a profit state based on the lottery result of the lottery means Accumulation means is profit When the current profit status flag set by the status flag setting means is stored in the profit status storage memory in which one or more types of profit status flags are already stored, the storage order of the current profit status flag is preset. It is characterized by having a storage order changing means for changing from the storage order.

  When a game ball is detected by the first start port, it is determined by the lottery means whether or not the profit state is generated by the profit state generating means. When one or more types of profit states are generated by the profit state generating means based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the profit states are temporarily stored by the profit state storage means. Therefore, the profit state accumulated in this way does not occur at that time, but it occurs later, and the monotony of the game is eliminated, the interest of the game is improved, and the player's expectation The feeling can be increased.

  When the current profit status is stored in the profit status storage memory in which one or more types of profit status flags have already been stored, the storage order changing means sets the storage order of the current profit status flags to a preset value. Changed from rank.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the lottery means, the profit state flag setting means, and the profit state storage means for temporarily storing the profit state without immediately generating the profit state by the profit state generation means are provided. When storing the current profit status flag set by the profit status flag setting means in the profit status storage memory in which one or more types of profit status flags have already been stored, Since the storage order changing means for changing from the preset storage order is provided, the storage order when storing the profit state can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

  This embodiment has a first start port, first display means for displaying the first symbol in a predetermined time, and a bullet ball provided with profit state generating means for generating one or more kinds of profit states advantageous to the player. It is an example when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the island structure provided in the pachinko hall, a plurality of card-type ball lending machines 1 and a plurality of pachinko machines 2 are alternately arranged in the length direction, and the card-type ball lending machine 1 is connected to the pachinko machine 2. Electrically connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko machine 2 that is a card-type ball game machine has a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame 3 and a front frame 4 pivotally attached to the outer frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. The outer frame 3 is detachably fixed to the island structure (not shown) in a state where the card-type ball lending machine 1 is sandwiched. A game board 5 is detachably attached to the front frame 4 from the back side, and a glass door 6 having a window portion 6a and a ball tray 8 for storing game balls for launching are provided corresponding to the front side of the game board 5. A front plate (not shown) is pivotally attached via hinges so as to be opened and closed.

  Below the front frame 4, there are provided a lower tray 9 for storing game balls overflowing or extracted from the ball receiving tray 8 and a firing handle 11 of the launching means 10. This launching means 10 includes a launching handle 11 that can be rotated, and a launching motor 13 that launches a game ball with a striking gutter 12 with a striking force corresponding to the pivoting angle of the launching handle 11 (see FIG. 3). Etc.). On the right side of the ball tray 8, an operation panel 14 for lending operation for the card-type ball lending machine 1 is provided.

  The operation panel 14 has a card remaining amount display portion 14a for displaying the remaining amount of the card with a three-digit number, a ball lending switch 14b for instructing ball lending for a predetermined amount of game balls, and a command for returning the card at the end of the game. Return switch 14c is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, a guide rail 15 for guiding a game ball is provided in a substantially annular shape on the outer periphery of the game board 5, which is composed of a metal outer rail and an inner rail. On the surface of the game board 5 corresponding to the lower end portion of the outer guide rail portion of the guide rail 15, a launch ball detection switch 16 including a proximity switch for detecting a game ball launched by the launch means 10 is embedded. Has been.

  In the game area 5a on the inner side of the guide rail 15, a center case 20 located substantially in the center thereof, a color liquid crystal display 21 provided in the center case 20, and a plurality of normal winning means 22 (in this case) 7), right and left normal symbol starting means (gate means or passing means) 23, special symbol starting means (symbol starting and winning means) 24, big prize opening means (opening / closing type winning means) 25, etc. Each is disposed at a predetermined position. Further, the center case 20 is provided with four normal symbol operation holding lamps 26 at the upper portion thereof and four special symbol operation holding lamps 27 at the lower portion thereof.

  Here, although a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like are provided in the game area 5a, illustration is omitted. The special symbol starting means 24 (which corresponds to the first starting port) includes a pair of left and right open / close claws 24a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, respectively, so that the open / close claws 24a are simultaneously opened / closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 28. It is configured. The special winning opening means 25 (which corresponds to a special winning opening) includes an opening / closing plate 25a that can be opened forward, and is configured to be opened and closed in the front-rear direction by a special electric accessory solenoid 29. . Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 25a is opened forward, it becomes easy for the game ball to win, and a state advantageous to the player occurs.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a gate-shaped game board holding body (so-called three-way frame) 35 is fixed to the outer periphery of the front frame 4, and the game board 5 and the back located on the rear side thereof. A mechanism board 36 is detachably attached to the front frame 4 by a game board holder 35. On the upper side of the back mechanism plate 36, a substrate cover 37 accommodating an external output substrate 38, a sphere tank 39, and a tank rail 40 connected to a sphere discharge port of the sphere tank 39 are provided. A payout / ball lending mechanism 41 connected to the downstream end of 40 is provided on the side of the back mechanism plate 36, and is connected to the downstream side of the payout / ball lending mechanism 41 below the back mechanism plate 36. A payout ball guide path 42 is provided.

  Here, from the external output board 38, various game information such as information on the number of fluctuations related to the special symbol (which corresponds to the first symbol) and information on the stop symbol are transmitted and output to an island computer (not shown) provided in the pachinko hall. The Therefore, the game balls or game balls for lending that are paid out as prize balls from the payout / ball lending mechanism 41 are paid out to the ball tray 8 via the payout ball guide path 42. A back cover 43 mounted on the back side of the game board 5 is fitted into a rectangular opening 36 a formed at a substantially central portion of the back mechanism plate 36.

  Inside the substrate case 44 mounted on the rear surface of the back cover 43, a main control substrate 45 is disposed on the rear side, and a symbol control substrate 46 is disposed on the front side. The liquid crystal display 21 disposed on the front side of the symbol control board 46 is electrically connected to the symbol control board 46 via a liquid crystal driver 108 (see FIG. 5). An audio lamp control board 48 is provided inside a board case 47 attached to the back cover 43 below the board case 44. A power supply board 50, a payout control board 51, and an external interface control board 52 (see FIG. 5) are provided inside a board case 49 mounted on the back mechanism plate 36 below the board case 47, respectively. Yes.

  Further, a launch control board 53 is provided inside the substrate case 18 mounted on the rear side of the launching means 10. These control boards 45 to 46, 48, 50 to 51, and 53 are respectively formed of independent printed boards, and each of the other control boards 45, 46, 48, and 51 excluding the power supply board 50 and the launch control board 53 includes A microcomputer composed of a one-chip integrated circuit is provided.

  The main control board 45 and the other control boards 46, 48, 51 are electrically connected via a connector with a plurality of signal lines, and a predetermined number is sent from the main control board 45 to each control board 48 (46), 51. Various control commands for executing the game operation can be basically transmitted by one-way communication. As described above, by adopting the one-way communication of the control command, it is possible to surely prevent the fraud related to the symbol stop of the normal symbol (which corresponds to the second symbol) or the special symbol.

Next, the control device of the pachinko machine 2 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.
The main control board 45 is provided with a CPU 45a, a ROM 45b, a RAM 45c, input / output interfaces 45d and 45e, etc. constituting a single-chip microcomputer.

  The input / output interface 45d is connected to a plurality of normal winning switch groups 22a for detecting the winning of game balls to the plurality of normal winning means 22, and to each normal symbol starting means 23 (this corresponds to the second starting opening). A normal symbol start switch 23a for detecting a winning of a game ball of the player, a special symbol start switch 24b for detecting a winning of a game ball to the special symbol starting means 24, and a game ball to the normal winning area 25b of the big winning opening means 25 A normal winning switch 25c for detecting the winning of the game, a specific winning switch 25e for detecting the winning of a game ball in the specific winning area (so-called V zone) 25d of the large winning opening means 25, a normal electric accessory solenoid 28, The special electric accessory solenoid 29 and the firing ball detection switch 16 are electrically connected to each other.

The payout control board 51 is provided with a CPU 51a, a ROM 51b, a RAM 51c, an input / output interface 51d, etc. constituting a single-chip microcomputer. The payout control board 51 is directly connected to the external I / F control board 52, and the external I / F control board 52 is connected to the payout / ball lending mechanism 41. The payout / ball lending mechanism 41 includes a switching solenoid 41a for selectively switching a game ball payout path between a prize ball and a ball lending, a payout motor 41b, a ball lending count switch 41c, and a prize ball counting switch. 41d are connected to each other.

  In this way, the payout control board 51 can directly receive various control commands relating to the payout transmitted from the main control board 45. Further, the operation panel 14, the card-type ball lending machine 1, and the launch control board 53 are electrically connected to the external I / F control board 52, respectively. The launch control board 53 is provided with a motor drive circuit 53 a, and the launch motor 13 is driven and controlled by the launch control board 53. The sound lamp control board 48 is provided with a CPU 48a, a ROM 48b, a RAM 48c, an input / output interface 48d, and the like constituting a single-chip microcomputer.

  The sound lamp control board 48 includes a speaker 55 provided on the back side of the ball tray 8, a probability change state display lamp 56 for displaying that the probability variation mode is set, a plurality of decorative lamp groups 57, A plurality of normal symbol operation hold lamps 26 and special symbol operation hold lamps 27 are connected. The sound lamp control board 48 can directly receive various control commands related to sound output and lamp lighting transmitted from the main control board 45.

  The symbol display board 46 includes a CPU 46a, a ROM 46b, a RAM 46c, an input / output interface 46d, and the like constituting a single-chip microcomputer. The symbol display substrate 46 is connected to the liquid crystal display 21 via a liquid crystal driver 98. Here, the liquid crystal display 21 displays three special symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) on the left display portion 21a, the middle display portion 21b, and the right display portion 21c, and two small normal symbols (left symbol). In addition to displaying the symbol (right symbol) on the small left display portion 21d and the right display portion 21e, it is possible to display moving images, speech balloons, and the like of various characters as effects.

  The power supply board 50 is provided not only with a plurality of power supply circuits for supplying a plurality of types of DC voltages to the control boards 45 to 46, 48, 50 to 53 and the electric actuators 28 and 29, but also with a power switch 50a, A clear switch 50b for erasing all game information stored in the RAMs 45c and 51c after power-on, a backup power source 50c for when a power failure occurs, and the like are provided.

  Next, various functions achieved as the main control means 60 by the control program stored in advance in the ROM 45b of the main control board 45 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.

  The main control means 60 configured on the main control board 45 controls the game operation according to the game mode and the behavior of the game ball, that is, various game parts 24 and 25 provided on the game board 5 and various game balls. While mainly controlling game control of the game board 5 related to input / output of signals to the winning switches 22a, 23a, 24b, 25c, 25e, etc. provided in the winning means 22-25, etc., the sound lamp control means 90 described later, Various control commands are sequentially transmitted and output to the control means 100 and the payout control means 115 as required.

  The main control means 60 includes a random number generation means 61, a random number extraction means 62, a hold means 63, a determination means 64, a profit state flag setting means 65, a profit state accumulation means 66, an accumulation release means 67, a profit In addition to the state ending means 68, the accumulated number counting means 69, the elapsed time counting means 70, the firing ball number counting means 71, the fluctuation count counting means 72, the symbol replacement means 73, and the symbol determination means 74, A mode storage means 75, a winning generation means 77, a probability fluctuation means 78, a profit state generation means 76 having a fluctuation time shortening means 79, a command transmission means 81, a winning counting means 82, and the like are provided.

  Here, the random number generating means 61, the random number extracting means 62, the judging means 64, and the like constitute a lottery means 85. The random number generating means 61 has both a random number generating function for a normal symbol winning lottery and a random number generating function for a special symbol big winning lottery. The random number generating means 61 repeatedly generates a numerical value of, for example, “0-9” for a normal symbol at a predetermined minute update cycle (for example, about 2 msec), and for example, “0-299” for a special symbol. Repeatedly occurs.

  The random number generator 61, the random number extractor 62, and the like constitute a design random number lottery means 86 for determining a normal symbol and a special symbol. Therefore, the random number generation means 61 has both a symbol random number generation function for drawing lots of normal symbol random numbers and a symbol random number generation function for lottering special symbol random numbers.

  The random number extraction means 62 has a control random number extraction function for random drawing of normal symbols and a control random number extraction function for random drawing of special symbols. The random number extraction means 62 hits one control random number when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting means 23 on either the left or right of the plurality of control random numbers for normal symbols generated cyclically by the random number generation means 61. The control random number is extracted as a determination random number, and among the plurality of special control random numbers generated cyclically by the random number generation means 61, one control random number when the game ball wins the special symbol start means 24 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Extract.

  The random number extraction means 62 further extracts a winning symbol random number for determining a stop symbol for determining a stop symbol for a special symbol and a winning symbol for determining a stop symbol for a special symbol and a probability variation. The holding means 63 temporarily stores up to four sets of the reserved ball information for the normal symbol and the number of active reserved balls generated when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting means 23 in the reserved ball information memory of the RAM 45c. By doing so, the design fluctuation of the normal design is suspended.

  The holding means 63 temporarily stores four sets of reserved ball information for special symbols and the number of active reserved balls generated when the game ball passes through the special symbol starting means 24 in the reserved ball information memory of the RAM 45c. By storing up to, the symbol variation of the special symbol is suspended. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol reserved ball information includes a jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of winning a game ball to the special symbol starter 24, a jackpot symbol random number, and a variable shortening timer value. , Up to four sets of stored ball information are stored on hold.

  That is, each time the holding unit 63 receives the holding ball information, the holding unit 63 sequentially stores the holding ball information up to the operation holding number 1, the operation holding number 2,... The operation holding number 4, and increments the operation holding number one by one. If not changing, the stored ball information of the operation hold number 1 is shifted to the operation hold number 0 for determination, and each piece of hold ball information after the operation hold number 2 is 1 The number of stored ball information is reduced and a free space is provided by overwriting by shifting to the younger operation hold number side, that is, the lower number (2 → 1, 3 → 2, 4 → 3) respectively. .

  Here, the main control means 60 is provided with a first reserved ball number counting means 83 and a second reserved ball number counting means 84 that are electrically connected to the holding means 63. The first reserved ball number counting means 83 counts the number of operation reserved balls for special symbols stored in the holding means 63. Further, the second reserved ball number counting means 84 counts the number of operation reserved balls for the normal symbol stored in the holding means 63.

  The determination means 64 has both a normal symbol determination function for a normal symbol and a special symbol determination function for a special symbol. In this case, the determination means 64 sets “0-8” among the plurality of control random numbers “0-9” for the normal symbol as a predetermined hit determination value, and also uses the plurality of control random numbers for the special symbol. Of “0 to 299”, only one control random number (for example, “17”) is set as a predetermined jackpot determination value, and only one control random number (for example, “117”) is predetermined. It is set as a judgment value for small hits.

  Accordingly, the determination unit 64 matches the hit determination random numbers for the normal symbol supplied from the holding unit 63 with a plurality of hit determination values set in advance at the time before the change of the normal symbol, Or, it is determined whether it is “out” that does not match. Further, the determination unit 64 further matches the jackpot determination random number and the small hit determination random number supplied for the special symbol supplied from the holding unit 63 with a jackpot determination value that matches a preset jackpot determination value before the change of the special symbol. ”,“ Small hit ”that matches the small hit determination value, or“ out (including out of reach) ”that does not match any of them.

  The determining unit 64 further determines the probability variation type jackpot based on the jackpot symbol random number supplied from the holding unit 63. The profit state flag setting means 65 receives the determination result from the determination means 64 and realizes a jackpot flag that realizes (saves) the “big hit state”, a small hit flag that realizes the “small hit state”, and a “probability variation state”. Probability variation flag to perform, open extension flag that realizes "open extended state" that extends the open time (open period) during which the special symbol starting means 24 is held in the open state, and shortening the fluctuation time of normal symbols and special symbols One of the variable time shortening flags for realizing the “variable time shortening state” is set.

  Here, the big hit state, the small hit state, the probability variation state, the open extended state, the variation time shortened state, and the like correspond to the profit state. The profit state accumulating means 66, which will be described in detail later, temporarily accumulates in the profit state accumulation memory of the RAM 45c without immediately generating the various profit states set by the profit state flag setting means 65. . As will be described in detail later, the accumulation cancellation unit 67 cancels the accumulation of the profit state accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 and allows the profit state generation unit 80 to generate the released profit state as appropriate.

  The profit state ending means 68, which will be described in detail later, out of the profit states generated by the release of the accumulation releasing means 67, the end of the probability variation state, the open extension state, and the symbol variation time reduction state, the gaming state Command accordingly. The accumulated number counting means 69 counts the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66, that is, the number of accumulated profit state flags. The elapsed time counting means 70 has timer means (not shown), and measures various elapsed times such as an elapsed time since the power was turned on, or an elapsed time when the previous big hit occurred.

  The shot ball number counting means 71 receives the shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection switch 16 and counts the number of shot balls since the power was turned on or the number of shot balls when the previous big hit occurred. The variation count counting means 72 receives a symbol variation command transmitted from the command transmission means 81 to be described later to the symbol control means 90 via the sound lamp control means 80, and the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on for the special symbol and the normal symbol. Or, the number of fluctuations from the time of the previous jackpot occurrence is counted.

  The symbol replacement means 73 replaces the big win symbol or the small win symbol when the big hit state or the small hit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66 when receiving the big hit or small hit determination from the determining means 64. Thus, the symbol determination means 74 is instructed to replace the symbol stop so that the symbol variation is stopped by the off symbol. In accordance with the determination result from the determination unit 64, the symbol determination unit 74 uses a predetermined lottery program to determine whether the winning symbol is a “winning” variation pattern designation command, a left symbol and a right symbol. The symbol designating command is determined by lottery, and when it is “off”, the variation pattern designating command for detachment and the symbol designating command for detaching are respectively determined by lottery.

  The symbol determination means 74 further determines, by lottery, a variation pattern designation command for jackpot, and a symbol designation command for the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol, respectively, for “special bonus”. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for removal and a symbol designation command for removal are determined by lottery.

  However, when the symbol determination means 74 receives a symbol replacement command from the symbol replacement means 73, the fluctuation pattern for symbol “success” determined for the normal symbol and the symbol designation command are changed to “off” and special The change pattern for “big hit” and the symbol designation command determined for symbols are changed to “out”. The symbol pattern storage means 75 is a jackpot symbol pattern at the time of fluctuation stop determined for the special symbol by the symbol determination unit 74 (this corresponds to the first specific symbol pattern), that is, a jackpot symbol when a jackpot state has occurred in the past Aspects are stored in order.

  The winning state generating means 77 included in the profit state generating means 76 generates a winning state for opening the big prize opening means 25, and has a big hit generating means 77a and a small hit generating means 77b as shown in FIG. is doing. The jackpot generation means 77a generates a jackpot state by a predetermined jackpot generation routine included in the game control when the determination means 64 determines the jackpot state. The small hit generation means 77b generates a small hit state by a predetermined small hit generation routine included in the game control when the determination means 64 determines the small hit state.

  However, when the big hit state or the small hit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulating unit 66, it is instructed to generate the big hit state or the small hit state when it is released by the accumulation releasing unit 67. Here, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol mode in which three special symbols are arranged, such as “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2”, “9, 9, 9”, of which The probability variation state is set in the case of a special symbol form in which an odd number of special symbols are arranged. Also, if the small hit is “7, Lucky, 7” or if the red “7, 7, 7” is a big hit, the green “7, 7, 7” is set as the small hit ing.

  When a big win occurs, when the opening / closing plate 25a of the big prize opening means 25 is opened forward and a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won The special game ends. By the way, when the open / close plate 25a is closed, if at least one game ball passes through the specific winning area 25d, the special game can be continued up to a predetermined predetermined round (for example, 16 rounds), which is advantageous to the player. A state is granted. However, when a small hit occurs, a special game of one round or only a few rounds occurs without causing a probability variation state.

  The probability variation means 78 included in the profit state generation means 76 is advantageous in at least one of the number of lotteries and the lottery probability of the lottery means 85. As shown in FIG. 8, the probability variation / release extension means 78a, Probability changing means 78b and open extension means 78c are provided. The probability fluctuation / open extension means 78a includes a probability fluctuation state in which the lottery probability for generating a profit state in the lottery means 85 is changed with a high probability, and an opening time from when the opening / closing claw 24a of the special symbol starting means 24 is opened to closing. At the same time, an open extended state is generated that extends the length of the screen.

  When the determination means 64 determines that the probability variation state is a probability variation type jackpot, after the special game that is the profit state is finished, until the next or one after another jackpot, or a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 Until the special symbol variation is completed, the number of determination values for jackpot in the determination means 64 is larger than usual (for example, 7, 17, 37, 47, 67), and the jackpot probability is increased. A high probability state (eg, 1/60) higher than the normal probability (eg, about 1/300).

  However, when the probability fluctuation state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation unit 66, it is instructed to operate when it is released by the accumulation release unit 67. In the open extended state, when the probability variation state is set, the normal electric means 24c of the special symbol starting means 24 is set to the normal time (for example, about 0.5 seconds) on condition that the normal symbol is “winning”. ) For a longer time (for example, about 3 seconds), the opening time of the opening / closing claw 24a is extended so that the game ball can easily enter. However, when the open extension state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, it is instructed to operate when it is released by the accumulation release means 67.

  The probability variation means 78b generates a probability variation state in which the lottery probability that causes the profit state to be generated by the lottery means 85 is varied with high probability. Moreover, the open extension means 78c generates an open extension state in which the opening time from when the opening / closing claw 24a of the special symbol starting means 24 is opened until it is closed is extended more than usual.

  The fluctuation time shortening means 79 included in the profit state generating means 76 generates a symbol short time state that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol more than usual. As shown in FIG. 8, the special symbol fluctuation time is shortened. Means 79a and normal symbol variation time shortening means 79b are provided. The special symbol variation time shortening means 79a generates a special symbol time-short state in which the variation time of the special symbol displayed by the special symbol display means 111 is shortened more than usual.

  Further, the normal symbol variation time shortening means 79b generates a normal symbol short time state in which the variation time of the normal symbol displayed by the normal symbol display means 112 is shortened more than usual. This symbol short-time state is when the number of active reserved balls of normal symbols and special symbols is received from the holding means 63, and the number of active reserved balls is, for example, “1” or more, and the maximum operating reserved number varies. When the shortening timer value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 0), the symbol time reduction state is set so as to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol or the variation time of the special symbol. However, when these symbol time-short states are accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, it is instructed to operate when they are released by the accumulation release means 67.

  The command transmission means 81 provides the voice lamp control means 90 with these normal symbol and special symbol variation pattern designation commands and symbol designation commands, accumulated number information, elapsed time information, shot ball number information, variation number information, etc. Various signals and information are transmitted whenever necessary, and various payout commands are sent to the payout control means 115. The winning counting means 82 counts the plurality of normal winning means 22, the special symbol starting means 24, and the game balls to be won in the normal winning area 25b and the specific winning area 25d included in the large winning opening means 25.

  Accordingly, the command transmission means 81 creates a payout command command for instructing payout of game balls based on the number of winning game balls counted by the win count means 82 and transmits it to the payout control means 115. The command transmission means 81 further sends various control commands such as a control command based on reserved ball information relating to the number of held game balls, a control command of probability variation information indicating a probability variation state, to the control means 90 and 115 to be transmitted. Output individually.

Next, various functions achieved as the sound lamp control means 90 by the control program stored in advance in the ROM 48b of the sound lamp control board 48 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.
The sound lamp control means 90 configured on the sound lamp control board 48 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control means 60, and a number of decorative lamps and effects provided on the game board 5, the front frame 4, etc. In addition to controlling lighting of the lamp groups 56 and 57 including lamps and the like, the speaker 55 provided on the back side of the ball tray 8 is driven and controlled to control sound output.

  Therefore, the sound lamp control means 90 includes command transmission / reception means 91, effect pattern storage means 92, effect pattern determination means 93, random number generation means 94, lighting control means 95, sound generation control means 96, and the like. Yes. The command transmission / reception unit 91 receives a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command from the command transmission unit 81 of the main control unit 60 and also sends a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command to the command transmission / reception unit 101 of the symbol control unit 100. Etc. can be transmitted.

  In the effect pattern storage means 92, a plurality of types of lamp effect control patterns for controlling lighting and blinking of the lamp groups 56 and 57 such as various display lamps and decoration lamps and the speaker 55 are sounded for each of the variation pattern designation commands. A plurality of types of speaker effect control patterns are stored in advance. The effect pattern determining means 93 selects a lamp effect control pattern and a speaker effect control pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command.

  However, when a plurality of options are provided in the lamp effect control pattern and the speaker effect control pattern, one of a predetermined number of control random numbers generated by the random number generating means 94 is extracted and this extracted One option is determined based on the control random number. The lighting control means 95 outputs a lighting drive signal based on the lamp effect control pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means 93, so that the lamp groups 56 and 57 are individually lit / flashing point controlled, and in addition to the normal symbols. The operation hold lamp 26 and the special symbol operation hold lamp 27 are controlled to be turned on. The sound generation control means 96 sounds the speaker 55 based on the drive signal based on the speaker effect control pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means 93.

Next, various functions achieved as the symbol control means 100 by the control program stored in advance in the ROM 46b of the symbol control board 46 will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG.
The symbol control unit 100 configured on the symbol control board 46 includes a command transmission / reception unit 101, a variation pattern storage unit 102, a variation pattern determination unit 103, a random number generation unit 104, an effect display data storage unit 105, and an effect. A control unit 106, a display device control unit 107, a liquid crystal driver 108, and the like are provided.

  The command transmission / reception unit 101 receives a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command from the command transmission / reception unit 91 of the sound lamp control unit 90 and can transmit various control commands to the command transmission / reception unit 91. . The fluctuation pattern storage means 102 stores fluctuation pattern information related to symbol fluctuation in which fluctuation contents (including fluctuation time) are associated with each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern designation commands for normal symbols and special symbols.

  The variation pattern determination unit 103 selects variation pattern information corresponding to the variation pattern designation command, and when a plurality of options are provided in the variation pattern information, a predetermined number of random number generation unit 104 generates a predetermined number. One of the control random numbers is extracted, and one option is determined based on the extracted control random number. The effect display data storage unit 105 stores various effect display data such as a jackpot or a small hit for each variation pattern, and a reach announcement effect, and an effect peculiar to the present application described later, and stores the profit state. In addition, various presentation display data such as a character to be produced is also stored when canceling the accumulated profit state.

  The production control unit 106 performs production control based on the variation pattern received from the main control unit 60, while performing production control when accumulating the profit state and production control when releasing the accumulated profit state, as will be described later. Control. The display device control unit 107 transmits various symbol display signals related to symbol variation received from the variation pattern determination unit 103 to the liquid crystal driver 108.

  The special symbols are variably displayed on the display portions 21a to 21c of the special symbol display means 111 (which corresponds to the first display means) of the display means 110 (which corresponds to the rendering means) configured on the liquid crystal display 21. The normal symbols are variably displayed on the display portions 21d and 21e of the normal symbol display means 112 (which corresponds to the second display means) of the display means 110. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 21 is a display unit 100 that realizes both display functions of the special symbol display unit 111 that displays three special symbols in a variable manner and the normal symbol display unit 112 that displays two normal symbols in a variable manner. In addition, various effects can be effectively produced with color images.

  In the special symbol display unit 111, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the display units 21a to 21c have any one of the jackpot symbol mode, the reach symbol mode, and the off symbol mode based on the determination result of the determination unit 64. Stops in the design mode. Furthermore, various effect displays such as an effect display with a symbol background are performed over substantially the entire display unit 110. Therefore, the display unit 110 corresponds to a production unit.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the payout control means 115 configured on the payout control board 51 includes a command transmission / reception means 116, a payout / ball lending control means 117, etc., and the main control is performed via the command transmission / reception means 116. Based on the payout command command received from the means 60, the payout / ball lending control means 117 instructs the payout / ball lending mechanism 41 to pay out the game ball.

  Here, when the payout / ball lending control means 117 has not received any error relating to payout from the external interface control means 120 configured on the external interface control board 52, the payout permission signal is sent to the launch control board 53. In order to transmit to the launch control means 121 configured above, when the player operates the operation handle 11, the launch motor 13 is driven by the launch control means 121 so that the game ball can be launched.

Next, the profit state accumulation means 66 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The profit state accumulating unit 66 includes a hit accumulating unit 130 for accumulating the hit state described above, a probability variable accumulating unit 131 for accumulating the probability variable state described above, and a variable time shortening accumulating unit for accumulating the symbol time-short state described above. Any one of 132, or some combination thereof. Here, in the figure, “AND” means having a combination, and “OR” means having any one.

  As described above, the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol display means 111 for displaying the special symbol in such a manner that the special symbol is changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the special symbol starting means 24, and the special symbol display. A ball game including profit state generating means 76 for generating a profit state advantageous to a player when the special stop symbol after change displayed by the means 111 is in a specific symbol mode (first specific symbol mode) In the machine 2, when the profit state is generated based on the lottery means 85 for drawing whether or not the profit state is generated on the condition that the game ball is won in the special symbol starting means 24, and the lottery result of the lottery means 85. The profit state is generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means 85, since the profit state storage means 66 temporarily stores the profit state without immediately generating the profit state by the profit state generating means 76. In this case, the profit state is not generated immediately by the profit state generation means 76 but is temporarily accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66 so that the profit state is generated with a delay. Therefore, unlike the conventional orthodox game, It is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game, enhance the interest of the game, and increase the player's expectation.

  Further, in this way, the big winning opening means 25 that can be opened and closed is provided, and the profit state generating means 76 has a hit generating means 77 for generating a winning state for opening the big winning opening means 25, and the profit state accumulating means 66. Since it has the hit accumulating means 130 for accumulating the hit state, the hit state can be surely temporarily stored without being generated immediately.

  Further, the profit state generating means 76 has a probability varying means 78 for generating a probability varying state that is advantageous in at least one of the lottery count and the lottery probability of the lottery means 85, and the profit state accumulating means 66 has the probability. Since the probability variable storage means 131 for storing the variable state is provided, the probability variable state can be temporarily stored without being generated immediately.

  Further, the profit state generating means 76 includes a fluctuation time shortening means 79 for generating a symbol short time state for shortening the fluctuation time of a normal symbol which is a special symbol or other symbols than usual, and the profit state accumulation means 66 includes: Since the variable time shortening accumulating means 132 for accumulating the symbol time-short state is provided, the symbol time-short state can be surely temporarily stored without being generated immediately.

The hit accumulation means 130 includes either one of the big hit accumulation means 140 and the small hit accumulation means 160, or a combination thereof.
As described above, the hit generating means 77 has the jackpot generating means 77a for generating a jackpot state for opening and closing the jackpot means 25 in accordance with a predetermined rule, and the hit accumulating means 130 stores the jackpot state. Since the jackpot accumulating means 140 is provided, it is possible to reliably accumulate temporarily without generating the jackpot state immediately.

  Further, the hit generating means 77 generates a small hit state that opens and closes the big prize opening means 25 in accordance with a predetermined rule a smaller number of times than the big hit state so that the degree of profit state is smaller than the big win state. Since it has the hit generating means 77b and the hit accumulating means 130 has the small hit accumulating means 160 for accumulating the small hit state, it is possible to reliably accumulate temporarily without generating the small hit state immediately.

Jackpot storage means 140 (see FIGS. 11 to 20).
The jackpot accumulating means 140 accumulates the jackpot state, and as shown in FIG. 11, the unconditional accumulating means 141 for accumulating the jackpot state unconditionally and the conditional accumulating means 142 for accumulating the jackpot state conditionally. One of them.

  As described above, when the jackpot accumulating means 140 includes the unconditional accumulating means 141 that unconditionally accumulates the big hit state, the unconditional accumulating means 141 reliably accumulates the big hit state without generating it immediately. be able to. Further, when the jackpot accumulating means 140 includes the conditional accumulating means 142 that conditionally accumulates the jackpot state, the conditional accumulating means 142 can reliably accumulate the condition without generating the jackpot state immediately. it can.

Unconditional storage means 141
As shown in FIG. 12, the unconditional storage unit 141 is configured by one of an unconditional storage unit 141Aa and an unconditional storage unit 141Ab.

Unconditional storage means 141Aa
The unconditional accumulating unit 141Aa includes an accumulating order changing unit 143 that changes an accumulating order when accumulating the big hit state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulating control unit 145, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 141Aa has the storage order changing unit 143 that changes the storage order when the big hit state is stored based on a predetermined rule, the storage order changing unit 143 is used to store the big hit state. The accumulation order can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 141Ab
The unconditional storage unit 141Ab includes an accumulation order no-change unit 144 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the big hit state in a predetermined order, the accumulation control unit 145, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 141Ab has the storage order no-change unit 144 that does not change the storage order when the jackpot state is stored, and does not change the storage order, the storage order no-change unit 144 sets the jackpot state. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order at the time of accumulation.

  In the unconditional storage means 141Ab, for example, when an open extension flag, a small hit flag, a special symbol time reduction flag, and a probability variation flag are sequentially stored in the profit state storage memory from the top, as shown in FIG. The accumulation order non-change unit 144 may accumulate the jackpot flag for the current jackpot state (accumulation order) without changing the accumulation order (accumulation order). Or, in the unconditional accumulating unit 141Aa, as shown in FIG. 22, the accumulating order changing unit 143 moves the accumulating flag for the current jackpot state to the head side (accumulating order 1) to accumulate, You may make it accumulate | store at random in arbitrary positions (accumulation order | rank) other than.

  In this way, when the jackpot is generated by internal lottery, if the jackpot state is temporarily unconditionally accumulated, as described above, the stop symbol after the symbol change is replaced with the jackpot symbol, Since the symbol replacement means 73 stops at the off symbol, the big hit state does not occur immediately due to the change stop after the current symbol change.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 142 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 142A to 142H shown in FIGS. 13 to 20, and the conditional storage units 142A to 142H will be sequentially described. . However, each of the conditional accumulation means 142A to 142H does not change the accumulation order changing means 143 for changing the accumulation order when accumulating the big hit state based on a predetermined rule, and the accumulation order when accumulating the big hit state. Includes any one of the storage order no-change means 144 according to a predetermined order.

  As described above, the conditional storage unit 142 includes the storage order changing unit 143 that changes the order in which the jackpot state is stored based on a predetermined rule. Therefore, the storage order changing unit 143 can condition the jackpot state. The accumulation order when accumulating can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule. Further, since the conditional storage unit 142 includes the storage order no-change unit 144 that does not change the order in which the jackpot state is stored and follows the predetermined order, the storage order no-change unit 144 sets the jackpot state as a condition. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating.

  In this way, when a jackpot is generated due to internal lottery, as described above, the stop symbol after symbol change is also a jackpot symbol when the jackpot state is temporarily stored conditionally. Instead, since it stops at the off symbol replaced by the symbol replacing means 73, the big hit state does not occur immediately due to the change stop after the current symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 13, the first conditional storage unit 142A is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Aa or the conditional storage unit 142Ab.
The conditional storage unit 142Aa includes a storage lottery unit 146 for lottery whether or not to store the big hit state, the above-described storage order changing unit 143, the storage control unit 145, and the like. The conditional storage unit 142Ab includes the storage lottery unit 146, the above-described storage order no change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the storage lottery means 146 has a plurality of winning numerical values for storage such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the jackpot state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is one of the winning numerical value tables. Only when the winning value is met, the current jackpot state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66. However, if the lottery value drawn when generating the jackpot state does not match any winning value of the activated winning number group, the current jackpot state is stored in the profit state storage means 66. Instead, it is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Aa includes the accumulation lottery unit 146 and the accumulation order changing unit 143 that changes the order of accumulating the big hit state based on a predetermined rule, whether or not to accumulate the big hit state. Can be determined by determining the lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 146, and the accumulation order when accumulating the jackpot condition conditionally can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule. Increases nature.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Ab includes the accumulation lottery unit 146 and the accumulation order non-change unit 144 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the big hit state without changing the accumulation order, the big hit state is accumulated. It is possible to determine whether or not the lottery condition is determined by the accumulation lottery means 146, and the jackpot state can be reliably determined in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally. Since it can accumulate | store, gameability increases.

As shown in FIG. 14, the next conditional storage unit 142B is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Ba or the conditional storage unit 142Bb.
The conditional storage unit 142Ba includes an external signal determination unit 147 that determines whether or not a signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for storing the big hit state, the above-described storage order changing unit 143, and the storage control unit. 145 etc. The conditional storage unit 142Bb includes the external signal determination unit 147, the above-described storage order no-change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like.

  In this case, the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. The jackpot state may be accumulated. Further, an accumulation command device may be separately installed in the hall, and the jackpot state may be accumulated at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by an accumulation command signal input from the accumulation command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 142Ba includes the external signal determination unit 147 and the accumulation order change unit 143 that determine whether or not the signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulating the big hit state. In this case, whether or not to store the jackpot state can be determined by determining the stored signal condition inputted from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determination means 147, and the jackpot state is stored conditionally. Since the storage order at that time can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional storage unit 142Bb includes the external signal determination unit 147 and the storage order no change unit 144, whether or not to store the big hit state is input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determination unit 147. Can be determined and determined, and the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is conditionally stored. Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15, the conditional storage unit 142C is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Ca or the conditional storage unit 142Cb.
The conditional accumulation unit 142Ca includes a firing ball number determination unit 148 that determines whether or not the number of shot balls counted by the firing ball number counting unit 71 is the number of firing balls that accumulates the big hit state, and the accumulation described above. An order changing unit 143 and an accumulation control unit 145 are included. The conditional accumulation unit 142Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 148, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 144, the accumulation control unit 145, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of shot balls for accumulation from the time of power-on is indicated in the shot ball number determining means 148 as "200 to 220", "400 to 420", and so on. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player increases, and when the player wins the lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the big hit), the current number by the shot ball count means 71 Only when the counted value of the number of fired balls matches the number of fired balls for accumulation in any of the fired ball number groups that are enabled, the current jackpot state is accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. May be.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the big hit state is generated) and the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is enabled The big hit state of this time is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77 without being stored in the profit state storage means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the big hit state), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally stored. Alternatively, one of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional accumulation means 142Ca accumulates the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 in the big hit state. In the case of having the firing ball number judging means 148 for judging whether or not it is the number of firing balls and the accumulation order changing means 143, whether or not the big hit state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number judging means 148 by the firing ball number condition. Since the order of accumulation when the jackpot state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Cb includes the firing ball number determination unit 148 and the accumulation order non-change unit 144, whether or not to store the big hit state is determined by the firing ball number determination unit 148 by the firing ball number condition. Since the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally, the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16, the conditional storage unit 142D is configured with either the conditional storage unit 142Da or the conditional storage unit 142Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 142Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 149 that determines whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number for accumulation in the big hit state, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 143, and The storage controller 145 and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 142Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 149, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 144, the accumulation control unit 145, and the like.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 149, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation, as shown in FIG. When the game is started by the player, profit states that have not been generated are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66, and when the big hit is generated, the current storage number by the storage number counting means 69 is set. Only in the case of “4 or less”, the current jackpot state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the jackpot state is generated) and the current jackpot state accumulation number in the profit state storage means 66 is 5 or more, the current jackpot state is the profit state accumulation. Without being accumulated in the means 66, it is generated immediately by the hit generating means 77. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating a big hit), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is An internal lottery is selected, and any of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is alternatively activated. Good.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 142Ca has the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 as the accumulation number for accumulating the big hit state. In the case of having the accumulated number determining means 149 and the accumulation order changing means 143 for determining whether or not the jackpot state is accumulated, the accumulated number determining means 149 determines whether or not the accumulated number condition is accumulated by determining the accumulated number condition. In addition, since the order of accumulation when the jackpot state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Cb includes the accumulation number determination unit 149 and the accumulation order non-change unit 144, the accumulation number determination unit 149 determines whether or not to accumulate the big hit state. Further, the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17, the conditional storage unit 142E is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Ea or the conditional storage unit 142Eb.
The conditional accumulating unit 142Ea includes an elapsed time determining unit 150 that determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring unit 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the big hit state, and the above-described accumulation order changing unit 143. And storage control means 145 and the like. The conditional storage unit 142Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 150, the storage order no change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 150 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of turning on the power "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210". In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit. When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the jackpot state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is validated. The jackpot state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when it matches any storage elapsed time in the elapsed time group being set.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time in the elapsed time group that has been validated when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the big hit state is generated), The big hit state is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the big hit state), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” May be selected internally, and any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 142Ea determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the big hit state. The elapsed time determining means 150 and the accumulation order changing means 143 can determine whether or not to store the jackpot state by determining the elapsed time condition by the elapsed time determining means 150, and Since the order of accumulation when the jackpot state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 150 and the accumulation order no change unit 144, the elapsed time determination unit 150 determines the elapsed time condition as to whether or not to accumulate the big hit state. Further, the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18, the conditional storage unit 142F is configured with either the conditional storage unit 142Fa or the conditional storage unit 142Fb.
The conditional storage unit 142Fa includes a symbol random number determination unit 151 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value for storing a big hit state, and the above-described change of the storage order. Means 143, accumulation control means 145, and the like. The conditional storage unit 142Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 151, the storage order no change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like described above.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 151, as shown in FIG. 27A, “even number symbol random number value” is set on the maker side as the symbol random number for accumulation. Only when the game is started by the player, and the symbol random value of the symbol pattern in the case of winning the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when generating a jackpot state) is the set “even-numbered symbol random value” Thus, the current big hit state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the jackpot is generated), when the symbol random number is an odd number, the current jackpot state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66, and the hit generation means 77 Occurs immediately. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the big hit state), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is Internally selected lottery, and any of the stored design random number values “even number random number value”, “odd number random number”, “multiple of“ 3 ”among even number random numbers ... May be alternatively activated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage unit 142Fa includes a symbol random number determination unit 151 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random number that accumulates the jackpot state, and a storage order change unit 143. Can be determined by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determining means 151, and the order of accumulation when conditionally accumulating the jackpot state is: Since it can change reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability increases.

  Further, when the conditional storage unit 142Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 151 and the storage order no change unit 144, the symbol random number determination unit 151 determines whether or not to store the jackpot state. Further, the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19, the conditional storage unit 142G is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Ga or the conditional storage unit 142Gb.
The conditional accumulation unit 142Ga includes a variation number determination unit 152 for determining whether or not the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is a variation number for accumulating the big hit state, and the accumulation order changing unit 143 described above. And storage control means 145 and the like. The conditional storage unit 142Gb includes the variation number determination unit 152, the above-described storage order non-change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation number determination means 152 has a plurality of variation numbers for accumulation since the power is turned on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (big hit) Only when the current fluctuation count value by the fluctuation count counting means 72 matches one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group, You may make it accumulate | store in the accumulation | storage means 66. FIG.

  However, if a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the jackpot is generated), if the current number of changes does not match any number of changes in the enabled number of changes group, The state is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the big hit state occurs), any one numerical value of “0-999” Are randomly drawn, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  As described above, the variation number counting unit 72 that counts the number of variations of the special symbol is provided. In the conditional accumulation unit 142Ga, the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is the variation number for accumulating the big hit state. In the case of having the fluctuation number determination means 152 for determining whether or not and the accumulation order changing means 143, the fluctuation number determination means 152 determines the fluctuation number condition of the first symbol to determine whether or not to accumulate the big hit state. In addition, the accumulation order when the jackpot state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 142Gb includes the fluctuation number determination means 152 and the accumulation order non-change means 144, whether or not the big hit state is accumulated is determined by the fluctuation number determination means 152 by the fluctuation number condition of the first symbol. Since the jackpot state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the jackpot state is stored conditionally, the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, the conditional storage unit 142H is configured by either the conditional storage unit 142Ha or the conditional storage unit 142Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 142Ha includes a symbol mode determining unit 153 that determines whether any symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storing unit 75 is a symbol mode for accumulating the big hit state, and the accumulation order described above. A change unit 143, an accumulation control hand 145, and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 142Hb includes the symbol pattern determination unit 153, the storage order no change unit 144, the storage control unit 145, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol style determining means 153 includes “1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5”, “7” , 7,7 "and" 9,9,9 "are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, when a game is started by the player and a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the current big hit state is generated), the previous time stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, the previous time or three times or more. The current jackpot state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when the previous jackpot symbol form matches any of the storing jackpot symbol forms shown in FIG.

  However, even when winning the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when generating a big hit state), if the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous big hit symbol patterns do not match any of the accumulation jackpot symbol patterns, The current big hit state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the hit generating means 77. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to the symbol pattern pattern with the most types among a plurality of symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75.

  As described above, the specific symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 142Ca includes the symbol mode. When any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 is a symbol aspect determining means 153 for determining whether or not the symbol aspect is accumulated in the big hit state, and the accumulation order changing means 143, Can be determined by determining the symbol mode condition based on the symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75 by the symbol mode determining unit 153, and the jackpot state can be conditionally set. Since the accumulation order at the time of accumulation can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional accumulation unit 142Cb includes the symbol form determination unit 153 and the accumulation order non-change unit 144, the symbol form determination unit 153 determines whether or not the jackpot state is accumulated in the symbol form storage unit 75. The jackpot state can be determined and determined on the basis of the stored symbol mode, and the jackpot state can be reliably determined according to a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the jackpot state is conditionally stored. Can be accumulated, so that the game is enhanced.

Small hit accumulation means 160 (see FIGS. 30 to 39).
The small hit accumulation means 160 accumulates the small hit state. As shown in FIG. 30, the unconditional accumulation means 161 for unconditionally accumulating the small hit state and the condition for conditionally accumulating the small hit state. Any one of the accumulating means 162 is provided.

  As described above, when the small hit accumulation means 160 includes the unconditional accumulation means 161 for accumulating the small hit state unconditionally, the unconditional accumulation means 161 ensures unconditionally without generating the small hit state immediately. Can accumulate. Further, when the small hit accumulation means 160 includes the conditional accumulation means 162 that conditionally accumulates the small hit state, the conditional accumulation means 162 reliably and conditionally accumulates without generating the small hit state immediately. can do.

Unconditional storage means 161
As shown in FIG. 31, the unconditional storage unit 161 includes any one of an unconditional storage unit 161Aa and an unconditional storage unit 161Ab.

Unconditional storage means 161Aa
The unconditional accumulation unit 161Aa includes an accumulation order changing unit 163 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulation control unit 165, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 161Aa has the storage order changing unit 163 that changes the storage order when the small hit state is stored based on a predetermined rule, the storage order changing unit 163 stores the small hit state. In this case, the storage order can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 161Ab
The unconditional accumulation means 161Ab includes an accumulation order no-change means 164 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state and does not change the predetermined order, an accumulation control means 165, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 161Ab has the storage order no-change unit 164 that does not change the storage order when the small hit state is stored, the storage order no-change unit 164 does not change the storage order. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating states.

  In the unconditional storage means 161Ab, for example, when an open extension flag, a jackpot flag, a special symbol time reduction flag, and a probability variation flag are sequentially stored from the top in the profit state storage memory, as shown in FIG. The small hit flag for the current small hit state may be stored on the tail side (storage order 5) without changing the storage order by the no-order changing means 164. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 41, the unconditional accumulating unit 161Aa moves the accumulating order changing unit 163 to move the small hitting flag for the current small hitting state to the head side (accumulating order 1) and accumulate, Or you may make it accumulate | store at random in arbitrary positions other than a tail side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 162 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 162A to 162H shown in FIGS. 32 to 39, and the conditional storage units 162A to 162H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional accumulation means 162A to 162H changes the accumulation order changing means 163 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state based on a predetermined rule, and the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state One of the storage order non-changing means 164 is included.

  As described above, the conditional storage unit 162 includes the storage order changing unit 163 that changes the order in which the small hit state is stored based on a predetermined rule. The accumulation order when accumulating in can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. In addition, the conditional accumulation unit 162 includes the accumulation order no-change unit 164 that does not change the order in which the small hit state is accumulated, and does not change the order, so the accumulation order no-change unit 164 sets the small hit state. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating under conditions.

As shown in FIG. 32, the first conditional storage unit 162A is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Aa or the conditional storage unit 162Ab.
The conditional storage unit 162Aa includes a storage lottery unit 166 for lottering whether or not to accumulate the small hit state, the above-described storage order changing unit 163, the storage control unit 165, and the like. The conditional storage unit 162Ab includes the storage lottery unit 166, the storage order no change unit 164, the storage control unit 165, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the accumulation lottery means 166 includes a plurality of winning numerical values such as “1 to 15”, “30 to 45”,... “270 to 285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the small hit state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is one of the winning numerical value tables. Only when the winning value is matched, the current small hit state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66. However, if the lottery value is selected by the lottery means 85 (when a small hit state is generated) and the lottery value selected does not match any of the winning value groups in the activated winning value group The small hit state of this time is generated immediately by the hit generation unit 77 without being stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Aa includes the accumulation lottery unit 166 and the accumulation order changing unit 163 that changes the order in which the small hit state is accumulated based on a predetermined rule, the small hit state is accumulated. Whether or not the accumulation lottery means 166 can determine and determine the lottery condition, and the accumulation order when the small hit state is accumulatively conditionally can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. Therefore, gameability is enhanced.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Ab includes the accumulation lottery unit 166 and the accumulation order non-change unit 164 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state without changing the accumulation order, Whether or not to accumulate can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 166, and without fail changing the accumulation sequence when accumulating the small hit state conditionally, it is ensured according to a predetermined order. Since the small hit state can be accumulated, the gameability is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 33, the next conditional storage unit 162B is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Ba or the conditional storage unit 162Bb.
Conditional accumulating means 162Ba includes an external signal determining means 167 for determining whether or not a signal input from outside the ball game machine 2 is a signal for accumulating a small hit state, the above-described accumulation order changing means 163 and It has an accumulation control means 165 and the like. The conditional storage unit 162Bb includes the external signal determination unit 147, the above-described storage order no-change unit 164, the storage control unit 165, and the like.

  In this case, when the signal input from the outside of the ball game machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. For example, the small hit state may be accumulated. Further, an accumulation command device may be separately installed in the hall, and a small hit state may be accumulated at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by an accumulation command signal input from the accumulation command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 162Ba includes the external signal determination unit 167 and the accumulation order change unit 163 that determine whether or not the signal input from outside the ball game machine is a signal for accumulating the small hit state. , Whether or not to accumulate the small hit state can be determined by determining the accumulated signal condition input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determining means 167, Since the order of accumulation at the time of accumulating can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Bb includes the external signal determination unit 167 and the accumulation order non-change unit 164, the external signal determination unit 167 determines whether or not to accumulate the small hit state from the outside of the pachinko machine 2. The input accumulated signal condition can be determined and determined, and the small hit state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the small hit state. Because it can, the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34, the conditional storage unit 162C is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Ca or the conditional storage unit 162Cb.
The conditional accumulating means 162Ca includes the firing ball number determining means 168 for determining whether or not the number of the firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of the firing balls for accumulating the small hit state, as described above. An accumulation order changing unit 163 and an accumulation control unit 165 are included. The conditional accumulation unit 162Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 168, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 164, the accumulation control unit 165, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of shot balls for accumulation from the time of turning on the power is set to “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player and the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and the winning ball is selected by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state is generated), the number of shot balls counting means 71 Only when the count value of the current number of fired balls by the number matches the number of fired balls for accumulation in the set number of fired ball groups, the current small hit state is accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. You may do it.

  However, if the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the small hit state is generated), and the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is enabled Is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state is generated). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional accumulation means 162Ca is configured such that the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 is stored in the small hit state. In the case of having the number of shot balls determining means 168 for determining whether or not the number of shot balls to be performed and the accumulation order changing means 163, the number of shot balls determining means 168 determines whether or not to accumulate the small hit state. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, and the accumulation order when the small hit state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 162Cb includes the firing ball number determination means 168 and the accumulation order non-change means 164, it is determined whether or not the small hit state is accumulated by the firing ball number determination means 168. Since it is possible to determine and determine the conditions, and to reliably accumulate the small hit state in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the small hit state, Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 35, the conditional storage unit 162D is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Da or the conditional storage unit 162Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 162Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 169 that determines whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number that performs accumulation in the small hit state, and the above-described accumulation order changing unit 163. And storage control means 165 and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 162Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 169, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 164, the accumulation control unit 165, and the like.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 169, as shown in FIG. 25A, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation. When the game by the player is started, the profit states that have not occurred are sequentially accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66, and when the lottery means 85 wins the prize (when the small hit state is generated), the accumulated number is counted. The current small hit state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66 only when the current storage number by the unit 69 is “4 or less”.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the small hit state is generated) and the current number of small hits stored in the profit state storage 66 is 5 or more, the current small hit state is Without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66, it is generated immediately by the hit generation means 77. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state occurs). The numerical value is drawn internally, and any of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. May be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 162Ca accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 to accumulate the small hit state. In the case of having the accumulated number judging means 169 for judging whether the number is a number or the accumulation order changing means 163, the accumulated number judging means 169 judges whether the accumulation number condition is accumulated or not. Since it is possible to determine and the accumulation order when the small hit state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Cb includes the accumulation number determination unit 169 and the accumulation order non-change unit 164, the accumulation number determination unit 169 determines whether or not the accumulation number condition is accumulated. In addition, since the small hit state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the small hit state is conditionally accumulated, the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36, the conditional storage unit 162E is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Ea or the conditional storage unit 162Eb.
The conditional accumulation unit 162Ea includes an elapsed time determination unit 170 that determines whether or not the elapsed time counted by the elapsed time measurement unit 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the small hit state, and the above-described accumulation order change unit. 163, storage control means 165, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 162Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 170, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 164, the accumulation control unit 165, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 170 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of power-on "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210",. In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit. When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the small hit state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is set. The small hit state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when it matches one of the storage elapsed times in the elapsed time group.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time in the enabled elapsed time group when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state is generated), this time The small hit state is immediately stored by the hit generating unit 77 without being stored in the profit state storing unit 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state occurs). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and one of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 162Ea is an elapsed time for which the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the small hit state. In the case of having the elapsed time determining unit 170 and the accumulation order changing unit 163 for determining whether or not to accumulate the small hit state, the elapsed time determining unit 170 can determine the elapsed time condition to determine. In addition, since the order of accumulation when conditionally accumulating the small hit state can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 170 and the accumulation order no change unit 164, the elapsed time determination unit 170 determines whether or not to accumulate the small hit state. In addition, since the small hit state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the small hit state is conditionally accumulated, the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37, the conditional storage unit 162F is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 162Fa and the conditional storage unit 162Fb.
The conditional storage unit 162Fa includes a symbol random number determination unit 171 for determining whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value for storing the small hit state, and the above-described accumulation order. A change unit 163, an accumulation control unit 165, and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 162Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 171 and the storage order no change unit 164 and the storage control unit 165 described above.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 171, as shown in FIG. 27A, “even number symbol random number value” is set on the manufacturer side as the symbol number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player and the symbol random number value of the symbol pattern when winning by the lottery means by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state is generated) is the set “even-numbered symbol random number value” For example, the current small hit state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the small hit state is generated) and the symbol random number is an odd number, the current small hit state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66, It is generated immediately by the generating means 77. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when the power is turned on, or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the small hit state), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” Is randomly selected, and any of the stored design random number values “even-numbered design random number value”, “odd-numbered design random number value”, or “3” of “even-numbered design random number values” is selected. Multiples "... may alternatively be validated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage unit 162Fa includes a symbol random number determination unit 171 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random number that accumulates a small hit state, and a storage order change unit. In the case of having 163, whether or not to accumulate the small hit state can be determined by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determining means 171 and the accumulation when the small hit state is accumulated conditionally Since the order can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional storage unit 162Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 171 and the storage order non-change unit 164, the symbol random number determination unit 17 determines whether or not the small hit state is to be stored. In addition, since the small hit state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the small hit state is conditionally accumulated, the gameability is improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 38, the conditional storage unit 162G is configured with either the conditional storage unit 162Ga or the conditional storage unit 162Gb.
The conditional accumulation unit 162Ga includes a variation number determination unit 172 that determines whether or not the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is a variation number that accumulates the small hit state, and the accumulation order changing unit described above. 163, storage control means 165, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 162Gb includes the variation number determination unit 172, the accumulation order non-change unit 164, the accumulation control unit 165, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation count determination means 172 has a plurality of variation variations for accumulation since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated. When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (small) Only when the count value of the current fluctuation count by the fluctuation count counting means 72 matches one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group at the time of generating the hit state) May be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, if the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the small hit state is generated), if the current variation count does not match any variation count in the variation count group that is enabled, this time The small hit state is immediately stored by the hit generating unit 77 without being stored in the profit state storing unit 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the small hit state occurs). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  As described above, the variation number counting unit 72 that counts the number of variations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 162Ga is a variation number in which the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 accumulates the small hit state. In the case of having the variation number determination unit 172 for determining whether or not there is an accumulation order changing unit 163, the variation number determination unit 172 determines the variation number condition of the special symbol to determine whether or not to accumulate the small hit state. In addition, the storage order when the small hit state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 162Gb includes the fluctuation number determination means 172 and the accumulation order non-change means 164, whether or not the small hit state is accumulated is determined by the fluctuation number determination means 172 by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Since it is possible to determine and determine the conditions, and it is possible to reliably accumulate the small hit state in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state conditionally, Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the conditional storage unit 162H is configured by either the conditional storage unit 162Ha or the conditional storage unit 162Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 162Ha includes a symbol form determining unit 173 that determines whether any of the symbol forms stored in the symbol form storing unit 75 is a symbol form that accumulates a small hit state, and the accumulation described above. An order changing unit 163 and a storage control hand 165 are included. The conditional storage unit 162Hb includes the symbol form determination unit 173, the storage order no change unit 164, the storage control unit 165, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol mode determining means 173 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. When the big hit state has occurred in the past, since the big win symbol mode is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by the lottery means 85 (the current small size) In the case of generating a hit state), when the previous, last two or more previous jackpot symbol modes stored in the symbol mode storage means 75 match any of the accumulation jackpot symbol modes shown in FIG. For example, the current small hit state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, even when winning by a lottery means 85 (when a small hit state is generated), if the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols does not match any of the bonus patterns for storage The small hit state of this time is generated immediately by the hit generation unit 77 without being stored in the profit state storage unit 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  As described above, the specific symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 162Ca includes the symbol mode. When any one of the symbol patterns stored in the storage unit 75 has a symbol pattern determination unit 173 for determining whether or not the symbol pattern is accumulated in the small hit state, and the accumulation order changing unit 163, Whether or not to accumulate the winning state can be determined by determining the symbol state condition based on the symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75 by the symbol mode determining unit 173, and the small hit state can be determined. Since the accumulation order when accumulating under conditions can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 162Cb includes the symbol form determination unit 173 and the accumulation order non-change unit 164, whether or not the small hit state is accumulated is stored in the symbol form storage unit 75 by the symbol form determination unit. Based on the stored symbol mode, the symbol mode condition can be determined and determined, and without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the small hit state conditionally, it is surely performed in the predetermined order. Since the small hit state can be accumulated, the gameability is enhanced.

  The probability-variable accumulation unit 131 includes any one of a probability variation / open extension accumulation unit 180, a probability variation accumulation unit 200, and an open extension accumulation unit 220.

  In this way, the normal symbol starting means 23 and the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol in such a manner that the normal symbol is changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball on the normal symbol starting means 23 are provided. The starter 24 is configured to be openable and closable, and is configured to open and close the special symbol starter 24 when the changed special stop symbol displayed by the normal symbol display unit 112 becomes a specific symbol form for the special symbol. Then, the probability changing means 78 has a probability change state in which the lottery probability for generating the profit state in the lottery means 85 is changed with a high probability and an opening time from when the special symbol starting means 24 is opened until it is closed. Probability variation / open extension means 78a for generating an open / extended state to be extended is included, and probability variable storage means 131 is a probability change for storing the probability change state and the open extension state. Since an open extension storage unit 180, without immediately generating the probability change state and an open extended state can be reliably temporarily accumulated.

  The probability variation means 78 has probability variation means 78b that generates a probability variation state that causes the lottery probability that causes the lottery means 85 to generate a profit state with high probability, and the probability variation accumulation means 131 includes a probability variation Since the probability variation accumulating means 200 for accumulating the state is provided, the probability variation state can be reliably and temporarily accumulated without immediately occurring.

  Furthermore, a normal symbol starting means 23 and a normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol in such a manner that the normal symbol is changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23 are provided. 24 is configured to be openable and closable, and is configured to open and close the special symbol starter 24 when the changed normal stop symbol displayed by the normal symbol display unit 112 becomes a specific symbol mode for the normal symbol, The probability variable means 78 includes an open extension means 78c that generates an open extension state in which the opening time from when the special symbol starting means 24 is opened until it is closed is longer than normal. The probability variable storage means 131 includes: Since the open extension accumulating means 220 for accumulating the open extension state is provided, the open extension state can be surely temporarily stored without being generated immediately.

Probability fluctuation / open extension accumulation means 180 (see FIGS. 42 to 51).
The probability fluctuation / open extension accumulation means 180 accumulates the probability fluctuation state and the open extension state. As shown in FIG. 42, the unconditional accumulation means 181 that unconditionally accumulates the probability fluctuation / open extension state; It has any one of conditional storage means 182 that conditionally stores the probability variation / open extension state.

  As described above, when the probability variation / open extension storage unit 180 includes the unconditional storage unit 181 that unconditionally stores the probability variation / open extension state, the unconditional storage unit 181 sets the probability change / open extension state. Accumulated unconditionally without generating immediately. Further, when the probability fluctuation / open extension accumulation means 180 includes the conditional accumulation means 182 that conditionally accumulates the probability fluctuation / open extension state, the probability accumulation / open extension state is immediately generated by the conditional accumulation means 182. It can be reliably and conditionally stored.

Unconditional storage means 181
As shown in FIG. 43, the unconditional storage unit 181 includes either one of the unconditional storage unit 181Aa and the unconditional storage unit 181Ab.

Unconditional storage means 181Aa
The unconditional accumulating unit 181Aa includes an accumulating order changing unit 183 that changes the accumulating order when accumulating the probability variation / open extended state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulating control unit 185, and the like. As described above, the unconditional storage unit 181Aa has the storage order changing unit 183 that changes the storage order when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is stored based on a predetermined rule. -Accumulation order when accumulating the open extension state can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 181Ab
The unconditional storage unit 181Ab includes a storage order no-change unit 184 that keeps the storage order when storing the probability variation / open extension state in a predetermined order, the storage control unit 185, and the like. As described above, the unconditional storage unit 181Ab has the storage order no-change unit 184 that does not change the storage order when storing the probability variation / open extension state, and does not change the storage order. Thus, it is possible to reliably store in the predetermined order without changing the storage order when storing the probability variation / open extension state.

  In the unconditional storage means 181Ab, for example, when an open extension flag, a small hit flag, a special symbol short time flag, and a big hit flag are sequentially stored in the profit state storage memory from the head, as shown in FIG. The probability change / open extension flag for the current probability change / open extension state may be stored on the tail side (storage order 5) without changing the storage order by the order change means 184. Alternatively, in the unconditional storage means 181Aa, as shown in FIG. 53, the storage order changing means 183 sets the probability change / open extension flag for the current probability change / open extension state to the head (storage order 1). You may make it accumulate | store by moving, or you may make it accumulate | store at random in arbitrary positions other than the tail side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 182 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 182A to 182H shown in FIGS. 44 to 51, and the conditional storage units 182A to 182H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional storage means 182A to 182H stores the storage order changing means 183 that changes the storage order when storing the probability fluctuation / open extension state based on a predetermined rule, and stores the probability fluctuation / open extension state. One of the storage order non-change means 184 that does not change the storage order at that time and keeps the storage order in a predetermined order is included.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 182 includes the accumulation order changing unit 183 that changes the order in which the probability variation / open extension state is accumulated based on a predetermined rule. -The accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the open extended state can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. In addition, the conditional storage unit 182 includes the storage order no-change unit 184 that does not change the order in which the probability fluctuation / open extension state is stored, and does not change the order. Without changing the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the probability variation / open extension state, it is possible to reliably accumulate in a predetermined order.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first conditional storage unit 182A is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Aa and the conditional storage unit 182Ab.
The conditional accumulating unit 182Aa includes an accumulating lottery unit 186 for lottering whether or not the probability fluctuation / open extension state is accumulated, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 183, the accumulation control unit 185, and the like. The conditional storage unit 182Ab includes the storage lottery unit 186, the storage order no change unit 184, the storage control unit 185, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the accumulation lottery means 186 includes a plurality of winning numerical values for accumulation such as “1 to 15”, “30 to 45”,... “270 to 285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When a lottery is performed by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), any one of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is the winning numerical value table. The probability fluctuation / open extension state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when one of the winning numerical values is met. However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is generated), the lottery value that is selected does not match any of the winning value groups in the activated winning value group In this case, the probability variation / open extension state of this time is immediately generated by the probability variation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation unit 182Aa includes the accumulation lottery unit 186 and the accumulation order changing unit 183 that changes the order when accumulating the probability variation / open extension state based on a predetermined rule, Whether or not to store the extended extended state can be determined by determining the lottery conditions by the storage lottery means 186, and the storage order when the probability fluctuation / open extended state is stored conditionally is determined according to a predetermined rule. Since it can change reliably based on this, gameability increases.

  Further, if the conditional storage means 182Ab has the storage lottery means 186 and the storage order non-change means 184 that does not change the storage order when storing the probability variation / open extension state, the order does not change. Whether or not the fluctuation / open extension state is to be accumulated can be determined by the lottery player 186 by determining the lottery conditions, and the order of accumulation when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is conditionally accumulated is changed. Therefore, the probability variation / open extension state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order, so that the gameability is improved.

As shown in FIG. 45, the next conditional storage unit 182B is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Ba and the conditional storage unit 182Bb.
The conditional accumulation means 182Ba includes an external signal determination means 187 for determining whether or not a signal input from outside the ball game machine 2 is a signal for accumulation in a probability variation / open extension state, and the accumulation order change described above. Means 183, accumulation control means 185, and the like. The conditional storage unit 182Bb includes the external signal determination unit 187, the storage order no change unit 184, the storage control unit 185, and the like described above.

  In this case, when the signal input from the outside of the ball game machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. For example, the probability fluctuation / open extension state may be accumulated. Further, a storage command device may be separately installed in the hall, and a probability variation / open extension state may be stored at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by a storage command signal input from the storage command device. .

  As described above, the conditional accumulation means 182Ba and the external signal determination means 187 for determining whether or not the signal input from outside the ball game machine is a signal for accumulation in the probability variation / open extension state and the accumulation order. In the case of having the changing means 183, whether or not to accumulate the probability variation / open extension state can be determined by judging the accumulated signal condition inputted from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal judging means 187, In addition, since the order of accumulation when the probability fluctuation / open extended state is conditionally accumulated can be changed based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  If the conditional storage means 182Bb has the external signal determination means 187 and the storage order no change means 184, the external signal determination means 187 determines whether or not to accumulate the probability variation / open extension state. 2 Can be determined by determining the condition of the stored signal input from outside, and the probability variation in the predetermined order is ensured without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation / open extended condition conditionally -Since the open extended state can be accumulated, the gameability is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46, the conditional storage unit 182C is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Ca and the conditional storage unit 182Cb.
The conditional accumulation means 182Ca includes a firing ball number determination means 188 that determines whether or not the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of firing balls that accumulates in the probability variation / open extension state. The storage order changing means 183 and the storage control means 185 described above are included. The conditional accumulation unit 182Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 188, the accumulation order non-change unit 184, the accumulation control unit 185, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of shot balls for accumulation from the time of power-on is indicated in the shot ball number determining means 148 as "200 to 220", "400 to 420", and so on. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player increases, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), the number of shot balls Only when the count value of the current number of shot balls by the counting means 71 matches the number of shot balls for accumulation in one of the set shot ball number groups, the current probability change / open extension state is in the profit state You may make it accumulate | store in the accumulation | storage means 66. FIG.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability change / open extended state is generated), the current number of fired balls matches any number of fired balls in the activated ball number group. If not, the probability fluctuation / open extension state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66 but is immediately generated by the probability fluctuation means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), when the probability variation / open extension state is generated, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the firing ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the firing ball number counting means 71 that counts the number of shot balls of the game ball. In the case of having the firing ball number determining means 188 and the accumulation order changing means 183 for determining whether or not the number of firing balls is to be stored, whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be stored is determined. The determining means 188 can determine and determine the condition of the number of shot balls, and the storage order when the probability fluctuation / open extension condition is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule. , Game play is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 182Cb includes the firing ball number determination unit 188 and the accumulation order non-change unit 184, whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determination unit 188. The number of shot balls can be determined and determined, and the probability variation / open extension state can be reliably changed according to the specified order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation / open extension condition conditionally. Since it can accumulate | store, gameability increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47, the conditional storage unit 182D is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Da and the conditional storage unit 182Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 182Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 189 that determines whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number that performs accumulation in the probability variation / open extension state, and the accumulation order described above. A change unit 183, an accumulation control unit 185, and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 182Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 189, the accumulation order no change unit 184, the accumulation control unit 185, and the like described above.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 189, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation as shown in FIG. When a game is started by a player and profit states that have not been generated are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66 and won by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), Only when the current accumulation number by the accumulation number counting means 69 is set to “4 or less”, the current probability fluctuation / open extension state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is generated) and the current jackpot state accumulation number in the profit state accumulation means 66 is 5 or more, the current probability fluctuation The open extended state is immediately generated by the probability varying means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability change / open extension state occurs). The numerical value is drawn internally, and any of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. May be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 182Ca stores the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 in the probability variation / open extension state. In the case of having the accumulation number determination means 189 for determining whether or not the accumulation number is to be stored and the accumulation order change means 183, the accumulation number determination means 189 stores whether or not the probability fluctuation / open extension state is to be accumulated. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, and furthermore, the accumulation order when accumulating the probability fluctuation / open extension condition conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional accumulation unit 182Cb includes the accumulation number determination unit 189 and the accumulation order non-change unit 184, the accumulation number determination unit 189 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be accumulated. Judgment can be made by determining the conditions, and the probability fluctuation / open extension state can be reliably stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when conditionally storing the probability fluctuation / open extension state. Can be played, so the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48, the conditional storage unit 182E is configured by either the conditional storage unit 182Ea or the conditional storage unit 182Eb.
The conditional accumulating unit 182Ea includes an elapsed time determining unit 190 that determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring unit 70 is an elapsed time for performing accumulation in the probability variation / open extension state, and the above-described accumulation order. A change unit 183, an accumulation control unit 185, and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 182Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 190, the storage sequence no change unit 184, the storage control unit 185, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 190 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of turning on the power "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210". In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit. When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 However, the probability variation / open extension state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when it matches the storage elapsed time of any of the set elapsed time groups.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins (when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is generated) and the current elapsed time does not match any of the elapsed time groups that are enabled The probability variation / open extension state of this time is immediately generated by the probability variation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability change / open extension state occurs), any of “0-999” One of the numerical values is randomly drawn, and one of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated. .

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 182Ea is an elapsed time for accumulating the probability variation / open extended state as the elapsed time counted by the elapsed time counting means 70. In the case of having the elapsed time determining means 190 for determining whether or not there is an accumulation order changing means 183, the elapsed time determining means 190 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be accumulated. In addition, the storage order when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 182Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 190 and the accumulation order no change unit 184, the elapsed time determination unit 190 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be accumulated. Judgment can be made by determining the conditions, and the probability fluctuation / open extension state can be reliably stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when conditionally storing the probability fluctuation / open extension state. Can be played, so the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49, the conditional storage unit 182F is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Fa and the conditional storage unit 182Fb.
The conditional storage unit 182Fa includes the symbol random number determination unit 191 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value that accumulates probability variation / release extension, and the above-described accumulation. An order change unit 183 and an accumulation control unit 185 are included. The conditional storage unit 182Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 191 and the storage order no change unit 184 and the storage control unit 185 described above.

  For example, in the symbol random number judging means 191, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), an “even number symbol random number value” is set on the manufacturer side as a symbol random number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player and the winner is selected by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), the symbol random number value of the symbol aspect is set to “even-numbered symbol random value” Only in this case, the current probability fluctuation / open extension state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated) and the design random number is an odd number, the current probability change / open extension state is accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Instead, it is generated immediately by the stochastic means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability fluctuation / open extension state is generated), any of “0-999” is selected. One numerical value is lottery internally, and any one of the random numbers for accumulation corresponding to the lottery value “even number random number value”, “odd number random number value”, “even number random number value” Alternatively, “a multiple of 3” may be validated alternatively. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage means 182Fa includes a design random number determination means 191 for determining whether or not the design random number value extracted by the design random number lottery means 86 is a design random number value for storing the probability variation / open extension state. In the case of having the accumulation order changing means 183, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be accumulated by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number judging means 191. Since the storage order when the state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional storage means 182Fb has the symbol random number determination means 191 and the storage order no change means 184, the symbol random number determination means 191 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be stored. Judgment can be made by determining the conditions, and the probability fluctuation / open extension state can be reliably stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when conditionally storing the probability fluctuation / open extension state. Can be played, so the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the conditional storage unit 182G is configured with one of the conditional storage unit 182Ga and the conditional storage unit 182Gb.
The conditional accumulation unit 182Ga includes a variation number determination unit 192 for determining whether or not the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is a variation number for accumulation in the probability variation / open extension state, and the accumulation order described above. A change unit 183, an accumulation control unit 185, and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 182Gb includes the variation number determination unit 192, the accumulation order non-change unit 184, the accumulation control unit 185, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation count determination means 192 includes a plurality of variation counts for accumulation since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated. When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (probability Only when the count value of the current fluctuation count by the fluctuation count counting means 72 matches one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group at the time when the fluctuation / open extension state is generated) The probability fluctuation / open extension state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation / open extension state is generated), the current variation count does not match any variation count of the activated variation count group. The probability variation / open extension state of this time is immediately generated by the probability variation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability change / open extension state occurs), any of “0-999” One numerical value is drawn internally, and any one of the fluctuation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value is alternatively activated. Good.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of variation of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 182Ga accumulates the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 in the probability variation / open extension state. In the case of having the fluctuation number determination means 192 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations and the accumulation order changing means 183, the fluctuation number determination means 192 determines whether or not the probability fluctuation / open extension state is to be accumulated. It is possible to determine and determine the condition of the number of fluctuations, and the accumulation order when accumulating the probability fluctuation / open extension condition conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule. Rise.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 182Gb includes the fluctuation number determination means 192 and the accumulation order non-change means 184, the fluctuation number determination means 192 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is accumulated. It is possible to determine and determine the condition of the number of fluctuations, and reliably change the probability fluctuation / open extension state according to the specified order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the probability fluctuation / open extension state conditionally. Since it can accumulate | store, gameability increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51, the conditional storage unit 182H is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 182Ha and the conditional storage unit 182Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 182Ha includes a symbol pattern determining unit 193 that determines whether any symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storing unit 75 is a symbol pattern in which the probability variation / open extension state is accumulated. The storage order changing means 183 and the storage control hand 185 described above are included. The conditional accumulation unit 182Hb includes the symbol form determination unit 193, the accumulation order no change unit 184, the accumulation control unit 185, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol mode determining means 193 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. Since the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state has occurred in the past is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by lottery by the lottery means 85 (the current probability When the variation / open extension state is generated), the previous jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern memory means 75, or the jackpot symbol pattern three times before or after the above match one of the accumulation jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. Only in this case, the current probability fluctuation / open extension state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, even when winning by lottery means 85 (when a probability fluctuation / open extension state is generated), the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols does not match any of the accumulation jackpot symbols In this case, the probability variation / open extension state of this time is generated immediately by the probability variation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  As described above, the specific symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 142Ca includes the symbol mode. If any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 is a symbol aspect determining means 153 for determining whether or not the jackpot state is accumulated, and the accumulation order changing means 143, the probability variation Whether or not to store the extended extended state can be determined by determining the pattern mode condition based on the pattern mode stored in the pattern mode storage unit 75 by the symbol mode determination unit 193, and the probability variation -Since the accumulation | storage order at the time of accumulating condition of an open extension condition can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability increases.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 142Cb includes the symbol form determination unit 193 and the accumulation order no change unit 144, the symbol form determination unit 193 determines whether or not the probability variation / open extension state is to be accumulated. Based on the design mode stored in the storage means 75, it is possible to determine and determine the design mode conditions, and without changing the accumulation sequence when accumulating the probability variation / open extension condition conditionally, Since the probability variation / open extension state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order, the gameability is improved.

Probability variation accumulating means 200 (see FIGS. 54 to 63).
The probability variation accumulation means 200 accumulates the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 54, the unconditional accumulation means 201 for unconditionally accumulating the probability variation state and the condition for conditionally accumulating the probability variation state. Any one of the accumulating means 202 is provided.

  As described above, when the probability variation accumulating unit 200 includes the unconditional accumulating unit 201 for accumulating the probability variation state unconditionally, the unconditional accumulation unit 201 ensures the unconditional condition without generating the probability variation state immediately. Can accumulate. Further, when the probability variation accumulating unit 200 includes the conditional accumulation unit 202 that conditionally accumulates the probability variation state, the conditional accumulation unit 202 reliably accumulates the condition condition without generating the probability variation state immediately. can do.

Unconditional storage means 201
As shown in FIG. 55, the unconditional storage unit 201 includes either one of an unconditional storage unit 201Aa and an unconditional storage unit 201Ab.

Unconditional storage means 201Aa
The unconditional accumulation unit 201Aa includes an accumulation order change unit 203 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulation control unit 205, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional accumulation unit 201Aa has the accumulation order changing unit 203 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation state based on a predetermined rule, the accumulation order changing unit 203 accumulates the probability variation state. In this case, the storage order can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 201Ab
The unconditional accumulating unit 201Ab includes an accumulation order no-change unit 204 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation state to a predetermined order, an accumulation control unit 205, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 201Ab has the storage order no-change unit 204 that does not change the storage order at the time of storing the probability fluctuation state, and does not change the storage order, Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating states.

  In the unconditional storage means 201Ab, for example, when an open extension flag, a small hit flag, a special symbol short time flag, and a big hit flag are sequentially stored from the top in the profit state storage memory, as shown in FIG. The probability variation flag for the current probability variation state may be accumulated on the tail side (accumulation sequence 5) without changing the accumulation sequence by the no-order changing unit 204. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 65, the unconditional accumulation unit 201Aa moves the accumulation sequence changing unit 203 to move the probability variation flag for the current probability variation state to the head (accumulation sequence 1) and accumulate, You may make it accumulate | store at random in arbitrary positions other than the tail side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 202 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 202A to 202H shown in FIGS. 56 to 63, and the conditional storage units 202A to 202H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional accumulation means 202A to 202H changes the accumulation order changing means 203 for changing the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation state based on a predetermined rule, and the accumulation order for accumulating the probability variation state. One of the storage order no-change means 204 is included.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 202 includes the accumulation order changing unit 203 that changes the order in which the probability variation states are accumulated based on a predetermined rule. The accumulation order when accumulating in can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. Further, since the conditional accumulation unit 202 includes the accumulation order no-change unit 204 that does not change the order in accumulating the probability variation state and does not change the order, the accumulation order no-change unit 204 determines the probability variation state. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating conditionally.

As shown in FIG. 56, the first conditional storage unit 202A is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Aa or the conditional storage unit 202Ab.
The conditional accumulating unit 202Aa includes an accumulating lottery unit 206 for lottering whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 203, the accumulation control unit 205, and the like. The conditional storage unit 202Ab includes the storage lottery unit 206, the storage order no change unit 204, the storage control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the storage lottery means 206 has a plurality of winning winning numerical values such as “1 to 15”, “30 to 45”,... “270 to 285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When a lottery is performed by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is one of the winning numerical value tables. The probability fluctuation state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when the winning value is matched. However, if the lottery value is selected by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated), and the lottery value selected does not match any of the winning numerical values of the selected winning numerical value group, The probability variation state this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 but is immediately generated by the probability variation unit 78.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Aa includes the accumulation lottery unit 206 and the accumulation order changing unit 203 that changes the order in which the probability variation state is accumulated based on a predetermined rule, the probability variation state is accumulated. Whether or not the accumulation lottery means 206 can determine and determine the lottery conditions, and the accumulation sequence when the probability fluctuation state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule. Therefore, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Ab includes the accumulation lottery unit 206 and the accumulation order no-change unit 204 that does not change the accumulation order when accumulating the probability variation state and does not change the accumulation order, the probability variation state is changed. Whether or not to accumulate can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 206, and without changing the accumulation sequence when the probability fluctuation state is conditionally accumulated, it is surely performed in a predetermined order. Since the probability variation state can be stored in the game, the game is improved.

As shown in FIG. 57, the next conditional storage unit 202B is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Ba or the conditional storage unit 202Bb.
The conditional accumulation unit 202Ba includes an external signal determination unit 207 that determines whether a signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulating the probability variation state, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 203, and accumulation control. Means 205 and the like. The conditional storage unit 202Bb includes the external signal determination unit 207, the storage order no change unit 204, the storage control unit 205, and the like described above.

  In this case, the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. The probability variation state may be accumulated. Further, an accumulation command device may be separately installed in the hall, and the probability variation state may be accumulated at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by an accumulation command signal input from the accumulation command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 202Ba includes the external signal determination unit 207 and the accumulation order change unit 203 that determine whether the signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulating the probability variation state. In the case of having the probability variation state, whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated can be determined by determining the accumulated signal condition inputted from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determination means 207, and the probability variation state is conditioned. Since the storage order at the time of storage can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Bb includes the external signal determination unit 207 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, the external signal determination unit 207 determines whether or not to accumulate the probability variation state from the outside of the pachinko machine 2. It is possible to determine and determine the input accumulation signal condition, and to reliably accumulate the probability variation state in the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. Can be played, so the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58, the conditional storage unit 202C is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Ca or the conditional storage unit 202Cb.
The conditional accumulation means 202Ca includes a firing ball number determination means 208 that determines whether or not the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of firing balls that accumulates the probability variation state, and the above-mentioned. An accumulation order changing unit 203 and an accumulation control unit 205 are included. The conditional accumulation unit 202Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 208, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 204, the accumulation control unit 205, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of firing balls for accumulation from the time of turning on the power is set to “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player and the number of game balls fired by the player is increased and the winning ball is selected by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time when the probability variation state is generated), the number of shot balls counting means 71 The probability variation state of this time is stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when the count value of the current number of shot balls according to the above matches the number of shot balls for accumulation in any of the set shot ball number groups. You may do it.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability variation state is generated), the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is enabled. Is generated immediately by the probability fluctuation means 78 without the current probability fluctuation state being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time when the probability variation state is generated). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the firing ball number counting means 71 that counts the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional accumulation means 202Ca has the probability that the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 accumulates the probability variation state. In the case of having the firing ball number determining means 208 for determining whether or not the number of firing balls is to be performed and the accumulation order changing means 203, the firing ball number determining means 208 determines whether or not the probability variation state is to be accumulated. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, and the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Cb includes the firing ball number determination unit 208 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determination unit 208. The conditions can be determined and determined, and the probability variation state can be reliably accumulated in the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59, the conditional storage unit 202D is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Da or the conditional storage unit 202Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 202Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 209 that determines whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number that performs accumulation in the probability variation state, and the accumulation order changing unit 203 described above. And storage control means 205 and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 202Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 209, the accumulation order no change unit 204, the accumulation control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination unit 209, as shown in FIG. 25A, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, the profit states that have not occurred are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66, and when the lottery means 85 wins the prize (when the probability variation state is generated), the accumulated number The current probability variation state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 only when the current accumulation number by the counting unit 69 is “4 or less”.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability fluctuation state is generated) and the current probability fluctuation state accumulation number in the profit state accumulation means 66 is 5 or more, the current probability fluctuation state is Without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66, it is generated immediately by the probability varying means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 25B, any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state occurs). The numerical value is drawn internally, and any of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. May be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 for counting the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 202Ca accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 to accumulate the probability variation state. In the case of having the accumulated number judging means 209 for judging whether or not the number is stored and the accumulation order changing means 203, the accumulated number judging means 209 judges whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated by judging the accumulated number condition. In addition, since the order of accumulation when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is improved.

  In addition, when the conditional storage unit 202Cb includes the storage number determination unit 209 and the storage order no change unit 204, the storage number determination unit 209 determines whether or not the probability variation state is stored. The probability variation state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without any change in the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the conditional storage unit 202E is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Ea or the conditional storage unit 202Eb.
The conditional accumulating unit 202Ea includes an elapsed time determining unit 210 that determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring unit 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the probability variation state, and the above-described accumulation order changing unit. 203, storage control means 205, and the like. The conditional storage unit 202Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 210, the storage order no change unit 204, the storage control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 210 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of turning on the power "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210". In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is set. The current probability fluctuation state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when it matches any storage elapsed time in the elapsed time group being set.

  However, if a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated), if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time in the elapsed time group that is enabled, this time The probability fluctuation state is immediately accumulated by the probability fluctuation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state occurs). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and one of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 202Ea determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the probability variation state. In the case of having the elapsed time determining means 210 and the accumulation order changing means 203 for determining whether or not the probability variation state is to be accumulated, the elapsed time determining means 210 can determine and determine the elapsed time condition. In addition, since the order of accumulation when the probability fluctuation state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 210 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, the elapsed time determination unit 210 determines whether the probability variation state is to be accumulated or not. The probability variation state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without any change in the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, the conditional storage unit 202F is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Fa or the conditional storage unit 202Fb.
The conditional accumulating unit 202Fa includes a symbol random number determining unit 211 that determines whether the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value that accumulates the probability variation state, and the above-described accumulation order. A change unit 203 and an accumulation control unit 205 are included. The conditional storage unit 202Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 211, the storage order no change unit 204, the storage control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 211, as shown in FIG. 27A, "even number symbol random number value" is set on the maker side as the symbol random number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, and the symbol random number value of the symbol pattern in the case of winning by the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated) is the set “even symbol random number value” For example, the current probability fluctuation state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, when a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated), if the symbol random number is an odd number, the current probability variation state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66, and the probability Immediately generated by variable means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time when the probability variation state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” Is randomly drawn, and any one of the stored design random number values “even-numbered design random number value”, “odd-numbered design random number value” or “even-numbered design random number value” of “3” Multiples "... may alternatively be validated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage means 202Fa includes a design random number determination means 211 and a storage order change means for determining whether the design random number value extracted by the design random number lottery means 86 is a design random number for accumulating the probability variation state. 203, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability variation state is to be accumulated by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determination means 211, and also the accumulation when the probability variation state is accumulated conditionally Since the order can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 211 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, the symbol random number determination unit 211 determines whether or not the probability variation state is to be accumulated. The probability variation state can be reliably accumulated in a predetermined order without any change in the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 62, the conditional storage unit 202G is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Ga or the conditional storage unit 202Gb.
The conditional accumulation unit 202Ga includes a variation number determination unit 212 for determining whether or not the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is a variation number for accumulating the probability variation state, and the accumulation order changing unit described above. 203, storage control means 205, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 202Gb includes the variation number determination unit 212, the accumulation order no change unit 204, the accumulation control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation number determination means 212 includes a plurality of variation numbers for accumulation since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (probability Only when the count value of the current fluctuation count by the fluctuation count counting means 72 coincides with one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group at the time when the fluctuation status is generated) May be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, if a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the probability variation state is generated), the current variation count does not match any variation count of the activated variation count group, this time The probability fluctuation state is immediately accumulated by the probability fluctuation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the probability variation state is generated). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 202Ga has the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 as the variation number for accumulating the probability variation state. In the case of having the variation number determination unit 212 for determining whether or not there is an accumulation order changing unit 203, the variation number determination unit 212 determines whether the probability variation state is to be accumulated or not by using the variation number determination unit 212. In addition, since the order of accumulation when the probability fluctuation state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Gb includes the variation number determination unit 212 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, the variation number determination unit 212 determines whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated by the variation number determination unit 212. The conditions can be determined and determined, and the probability variation state can be reliably accumulated in the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the probability variation state is conditionally accumulated. Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63, the conditional storage unit 202H is configured by either the conditional storage unit 202Ha or the conditional storage unit 202Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 202Ha includes a symbol form determining unit 173 that determines whether any of the symbol forms stored in the symbol form storing unit 75 is a symbol form that accumulates the probability variation state, and the above-described accumulation. An order changing unit 203 and an accumulation control hand 205 are included. The conditional accumulation unit 202Hb includes the symbol form determination unit 213, the accumulation order no change unit 204, the accumulation control unit 205, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol style determination means 213 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. Since the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state has occurred in the past is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by lottery by the lottery means 85 (the current probability In the case of generating a fluctuating state), when the previous jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern memory means 75, or the jackpot symbol pattern three or more times before is matched with one of the accumulation jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. For example, the current probability fluctuation state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, even when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the probability variation state is generated), if the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols do not match any of the accumulation jackpot symbols The probability variation state of this time is generated immediately by the probability variation means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  As described above, the specific symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 202Ha includes the symbol mode. If any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 has the symbol aspect determining means 213 for determining whether or not the symbol variation accumulation state is accumulated, and the accumulation order changing means 203, the probability Whether or not to accumulate the variation state can be determined by determining the symbol state condition based on the symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75 by the symbol mode determination unit 213, and the probability variation state can be determined. Since the accumulation order when accumulating under conditions can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 202Ab includes the symbol form determination unit 213 and the accumulation order non-change unit 204, the symbol form determination unit 213 determines whether or not the probability variation state is accumulated by the symbol form storage unit 75. The design mode conditions can be determined and determined based on the stored design mode, and without changing the storage order when the probability variation state is stored conditionally, it is ensured according to the predetermined order. Since the probability variation state can be stored in the game, the game is improved.

Open extension accumulation means 220 (see FIGS. 66 to 75).
The open extension accumulation means 220 accumulates the open extension state. As shown in FIG. 66, the unconditional accumulation means 221 that unconditionally accumulates the open extension state, and the condition that conditionally accumulates the open extension state. Any one of the accumulating means 222 is provided.

  As described above, when the open extension accumulation means 220 includes the unconditional accumulation means 221 that unconditionally accumulates the open extension state, the unconditional accumulation means 221 ensures the unconditional condition without generating the open extension state immediately. Can accumulate. Further, when the open extension accumulation means 220 includes the conditional accumulation means 222 that conditionally accumulates the open extension state, the conditional accumulation means 222 reliably and reliably accumulates the open extension state without immediately generating it. can do.

Unconditional storage means 221
As shown in FIG. 67, the unconditional storage unit 221 includes either one of the unconditional storage unit 221Aa and the unconditional storage unit 221Ab.

Unconditional storage means 221Aa
The unconditional accumulating unit 221Aa includes an accumulating order changing unit 223 that changes an accumulating order when accumulating the probability variation state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulation control unit 225, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 221Aa has the storage order change unit 223 that changes the storage order when the open extended state is stored based on a predetermined rule, the storage order change unit 223 stores the open extended state. In this case, the storage order can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 221Ab
The unconditional accumulation unit 221Ab includes an accumulation order no-change unit 224 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the open extension state to be in a predetermined order, an accumulation control unit 225, and the like. As described above, the unconditional storage means 221Ab has the storage order no-change means 224 that does not change the storage order when the open extension state is stored, and does not change the storage order. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating states.

  In the unconditional storage means 221Ab, for example, when a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a special symbol time reduction flag, and a probability variation flag are sequentially stored in the profit state storage memory from the head, as shown in FIG. The probability variation flag for the current open extended state may be accumulated on the end side (accumulation order 5) without changing the accumulation order by the non-order changing means 224. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 77, the unconditional accumulating unit 221Aa moves the accumulative order changing unit 223 to move the probability variation flag for the current open extended state to the head side (accumulating order 1) and accumulate, You may make it accumulate | store at random in arbitrary positions other than the tail side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 222 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 222A to 222H shown in FIGS. 68 to 75, and the conditional storage units 222A to 222H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional accumulation means 222A to 222H changes the accumulation order changing means 223 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the open extended state based on a predetermined rule, and the accumulation order when accumulating the open extended state. The storage order non-changing means 224 is configured to be in a predetermined order without being configured.

  As described above, the conditional storage unit 222 includes the storage order changing unit 223 that changes the order in which the open extended state is stored based on a predetermined rule. Therefore, the storage order changing unit 223 makes the open extended state conditional. The accumulation order when accumulating in can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. Further, since the conditional accumulation unit 222 includes the accumulation order no-change unit 224 that does not change the order when accumulating the open extension state and does not change the order, the accumulation order no change unit 224 sets the open extension state. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating conditionally.

As shown in FIG. 68, the first conditional storage unit 222A includes either a conditional storage unit 222Aa or a conditional storage unit 222Ab.
The conditional accumulation unit 222Aa includes an accumulation lottery unit 226 for lottering whether to accumulate the open extension state, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 223, the accumulation control unit 225, and the like. The conditional storage unit 222Ab includes the storage lottery unit 226, the storage order no change unit 224, the storage control unit 225, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the accumulation lottery means 226 has a plurality of winning numerical values for accumulation such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When a lottery is performed by the lottery means 85 (when the open extended state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is one of the winning numerical values table. Only when the winning numerical value is matched, the current open extended state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66. However, if the lottery value by the lottery means 85 does not match any winning value of the winning numerical value group when the lottery value selected by the lottery means 85 (when the extended extended state is generated), The current open extended state is immediately generated by the probability varying means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation unit 222Aa includes the accumulation lottery unit 226 and the accumulation order changing unit 223 that changes the order of accumulating the open extended state based on a predetermined rule, the open extended state is accumulated. It can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 226, and the accumulation sequence when the open extended state is conditionally accumulated can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. Therefore, gameability is enhanced.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 222Ab includes the accumulation lottery unit 226 and the accumulation order non-change unit 224 that does not change the accumulation order when accumulating the open extension state, and does not change the accumulation order, the open extension state is set. Whether or not to accumulate can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 226, and without fail changing the accumulation sequence when accumulating the open extended state conditionally, reliably Since the open extended state can be stored in the game, the game is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 69, the next conditional storage unit 222B is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 222Ba and the conditional storage unit 222Bb.
The conditional accumulation means 222Ba includes an external signal determination means 227 for determining whether or not a signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulation in the open extended state, the accumulation order changing means 223 and the accumulation control described above. Means 225 and the like. The conditional storage unit 222Bb includes the external signal determination unit 227, the above-described storage order no change unit 224, the storage control unit 225, and the like.

  In this case, the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. The open extension state may be accumulated. Further, an accumulation command device may be separately installed in the hall, and the open extension state may be accumulated at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 based on the accumulation command signal input from the accumulation command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 222Ba includes the external signal determination unit 227 and the accumulation order change unit 223 that determine whether or not the signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for performing accumulation in the open extended state. In the case of having the open extended state, whether or not to store the open extended state can be determined by determining the accumulated signal condition inputted from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determining means 227, and the open extended state is conditional. Since the storage order at the time of storage can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 222Bb has the external signal determination means 227 and the accumulation order non-change means 224, the external signal determination means 227 determines whether or not the open extended state is accumulated. It is possible to determine and determine the storage signal condition inputted from the storage, and reliably store the open extension state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally This increases the game playability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the conditional storage unit 222C is configured by either the conditional storage unit 222Ca or the conditional storage unit 222Cb.
The conditional accumulation means 222Ca includes a firing ball number determination means 228 for determining whether or not the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of firing balls for accumulation in the open extended state, An accumulation order changing unit 223, an accumulation control unit 225, and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 222Cb includes the number-of-fired ball number determination unit 228, the above-described storage order non-change unit 224, the storage control unit 225, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of firing balls for accumulation from the time of turning on the power is set to “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player increases, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the open extended state is generated), the shot ball number counting means 71 Only when the count value of the current number of fired balls by accords with the number of fired balls for accumulation in any of the set number of fired ball groups, the current extended extended state is stored in the profit state storage means 66. You may do it.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the open extended state is generated), when the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the activated ball number group Is immediately generated by the probability varying means 78 without the current open extended state being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time when the open extended state is generated). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional accumulation means 222Ca has the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 accumulated in the open extended state. In the case of having the firing ball number determining means 228 for determining whether or not the number of fired balls is to be performed and the accumulation order changing means 223, whether or not the open extended state is to be accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determining means 228 The number of conditions can be determined and determined, and the storage order when the extended extended state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 222Cb includes the firing ball number determination means 228 and the accumulation order non-change means 224, whether or not the open extended state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determination means 228. It is possible to determine and determine the conditions, and it is possible to reliably store the open extension state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extension state is stored conditionally. Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the conditional storage unit 222D is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 222Da and the conditional storage unit 222Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 222Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 229 that determines whether the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number that performs accumulation in the open extended state, and the above-described accumulation order change unit 223. And storage control means 225 and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 222Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 229, the accumulation order non-change unit 224, the accumulation control unit 225, and the like described above.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 229, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation, as shown in FIG. When a game is started by a player, profit states that have not occurred are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the open extended state is generated), the accumulated number is counted. The current open extension state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 only when the current accumulation number by the unit 69 is “4 or less”.

  However, if the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the open extended state is generated) and the current open extended state accumulation number in the profit state storage means 66 is 5 or more, the current open extended state is Without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66, it is generated immediately by the probability varying means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the open extended state occurs). The numerical value is drawn internally, and any of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. May be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 222Da accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 in the open extended state. In the case of having the accumulated number judging means 229 and the accumulation order changing means 223 for judging whether or not it is a number, whether or not the open extension state is accumulated is judged by the accumulated number judging means 229 by determining the accumulated number condition. Since it is possible to determine and the accumulation order when accumulating the open extended condition conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 222Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 229 and the accumulation order non-change unit 224, the accumulation number determination unit 229 determines the accumulation number condition to determine whether or not to store the open extended state. In addition, it is possible to reliably store the open extended state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the conditional storage unit 222E is configured with either the conditional storage unit 222Ea or the conditional storage unit 222Eb.
The conditional accumulation unit 222Ea includes an elapsed time determination unit 230 that determines whether or not the elapsed time counted by the elapsed time measurement unit 70 is an elapsed time for performing accumulation in the open extended state, and the above-described accumulation order change unit. 223, accumulation control means 225, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 222Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 230, the accumulation order no change unit 224, the accumulation control unit 225, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 230 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of power-on "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210",. In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the open extended state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is set. Only when the elapsed time for accumulation in the elapsed time group that has been set matches, the current extended extended state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, if a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the extended extended state is generated), if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time in the elapsed time group that is enabled, this time The open extension state is immediately accumulated by the probability varying means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the open extended state occurs). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and one of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 222Ea determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measurement means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulation in the open extended state. In the case of having the elapsed time determining means 230 and the accumulation order changing means 223, it is possible to determine whether or not to store the extended extended state by determining the elapsed time condition by the elapsed time determining means 230. In addition, the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 222Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 230 and the accumulation order no change unit 224, the elapsed time determination unit 230 determines whether or not the open extended state is to be accumulated. In addition, it is possible to reliably store the open extended state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 73, the conditional storage unit 222F is configured by either the conditional storage unit 222Fa or the conditional storage unit 222Fb.
The conditional accumulating unit 222Fa includes a symbol random number determining unit 231 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value that performs accumulation in the open extended state, and the above-described accumulation order. A change unit 223, an accumulation control unit 225, and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 222Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 231 and the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 224, accumulation control unit 225, and the like.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 231, as shown in FIG. 27A, the “even number symbol random number value” is set on the maker side as the symbol random number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, and the symbol random number value of the symbol pattern when winning by the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the extended extended state is generated) is the set “even symbol random number value” For example, the current open extended state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins (when the open extended state is generated), if the design random number is an odd number, the current open extended state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating unit 66, and the probability Immediately generated by variable means 78. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time when the open extended state is generated), an arbitrary numerical value of “0 to 999”. Is randomly selected, and any of the stored design random number values “even-numbered design random number value”, “odd-numbered design random number value”, or “3” of “even-numbered design random number values” is selected. Multiples "... may alternatively be validated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage means 222Fa includes a design random number determination means 231 and a storage order change means for determining whether or not the design random number value extracted by the design random number lottery means 86 is a design random number for storing in the open extended state. In the case of having 223, whether or not to store the open extended state can be determined by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determining means 231, and storage when the open extended state is stored conditionally Since the order can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional storage unit 222Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 231 and the storage order non-change unit 224, the symbol random number determination unit 231 determines whether or not the open extended state is stored. In addition, it is possible to reliably store the open extended state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally, so that the gameability is improved. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 74, the conditional storage unit 222G is configured with either the conditional storage unit 222Ga or the conditional storage unit 222Gb.
The conditional accumulation unit 222Ga includes a variation number determination unit 232 for determining whether or not the variation number counted by the variation number counting unit 72 is a variation number for performing accumulation in the open extended state, and the above-described accumulation order changing unit. 223, accumulation control means 225, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 222Gb includes the variation number determination unit 232, the accumulation order no-change unit 224, the accumulation control unit 225, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the fluctuation count determination means 232 has a plurality of fluctuation counts for accumulation since the power is turned on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates as the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (open) Only when the count value of the current fluctuation count by the fluctuation count counting means 72 matches one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group at the time of generating the extended status) May be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, if a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the extended extension state is generated), if the current number of changes does not match any number of changes in the enabled number of changes group, this time The open extension state is immediately accumulated by the probability varying means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the extended extended state is generated). A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 222Ga has the number of fluctuations counted by the variation number counting means 72 as the number of fluctuations in which accumulation in the open extended state is performed. In the case of having the variation number determination means 232 for determining whether or not there is an accumulation order changing means 223, whether or not the open extension state is accumulated is determined by the variation number determination means 232 by the variation number condition for the first symbol. Since it can be determined and determined, and the accumulation order when accumulating the open extended state conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 222Gb includes the variation number determination means 232 and the accumulation order non-change means 224, the variation number determination means 232 determines whether or not the open extension state is accumulated. Since it is possible to determine and determine the number of times, and it is possible to reliably store the open extension state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the open extended state is stored conditionally, Increases playability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75, the conditional storage unit 222H is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 222Ha and the conditional storage unit 222Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 222Ha includes a symbol mode determining unit 233 that determines whether any symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75 is a symbol mode for storing in the open extended state, and the accumulation described above. An order change means 223, an accumulation control hand 225, and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 222Hb includes the symbol pattern determination unit 233, the storage order no change unit 224, the storage control unit 225, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol style determination means 233 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. When the big hit state has occurred in the past, since the big win symbol mode is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by the lottery means 85 (this release) In the case of generating an extended state), when the last jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75, the previous two times, or three or more times before is matched with one of the accumulation jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. For example, the current open extended state may be stored in the profit state storage unit 66.

  However, even if the lottery means 85 wins (when an open extended state is generated), if the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols does not match any of the accumulating jackpot symbols The present open extended state is immediately generated by the probability varying means 78 without being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  In this way, the special symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 222Ha includes the symbol mode. If any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 is a symbol aspect determining means 233 for determining whether or not the symbol is stored in the open extended state, the storage order changing means 223 is opened. Whether or not the extension state is to be accumulated can be determined by determining the symbol state condition based on the symbol mode stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75 by the symbol mode determination unit 233, and the open extension state can be determined. Since the accumulation order when accumulating under conditions can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional accumulation unit 222Ab includes the symbol form determination unit 233 and the accumulation order non-change unit 224, the symbol form determination unit 233 determines whether or not the open extended state is to be accumulated. The design mode conditions can be determined and determined based on the design mode stored in the table, and without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the open extended state conditionally, it is ensured in the predetermined order. Since the open extended state can be stored in the game, the game is enhanced.

  The above-described variation time shortening accumulation unit 132 includes any one of the special symbol variation time shortening accumulation unit 240 and the normal symbol variation time shortening accumulation unit 260, or a combination thereof.

  As described above, the variation time shortening means 79 includes the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a for generating a special symbol time-short state that shortens the variation time of the special symbol displayed by the special symbol display means 111 more than usual. The time reduction accumulating means 132 has the special symbol fluctuation time reduction accumulating means 240 for accumulating the special symbol short time state. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening accumulating means 240 does not cause the special symbol short time state to be generated immediately and is surely temporarily stored. Can be accumulated.

  Further, the normal symbol starting means 23 and the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol in such a manner that the normal symbol is changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23 are provided. The special symbol starting means 24 is configured to open and close when the normal stop symbol after the change displayed in 112 becomes a specific symbol form for the normal symbol, and the fluctuation time shortening means 89 is the normal symbol display means 112. The normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b for generating a normal symbol short time state for shortening the fluctuation time of the displayed normal symbol than usual is provided, and the fluctuation time shortening accumulating means 132 is a normal symbol fluctuation for accumulating the normal symbol short time state. Since the time shortening accumulating means 260 is provided, the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening accumulating means 260 is surely temporarily generated without immediately generating a normal symbol time-short state. It can be stored in.

Special symbol variation time reduction accumulating means 240 (see FIGS. 78 to 87).
The special symbol variation time reduction accumulating means 240 accumulates the special symbol short time state. As shown in FIG. 78, the special symbol short time state unconditionally accumulates the special symbol short time state 241 and the special symbol short time state. It has any one of conditional storage means 242 which stores it conditionally.

  As described above, when the special symbol variation time reduction accumulating means 240 has the unconditional accumulating means 241 for accumulating the special symbol short-time state unconditionally, the special symbol short-time state can be generated immediately by the unconditional accumulation means 241. It can be reliably accumulated unconditionally. Further, when the special symbol variation time shortening accumulating means 240 has the conditional accumulating means 242 that conditionally accumulates the special symbol short time state, the conditional symbol accumulating means 242 makes the condition without generating the special symbol short time state immediately. It can be reliably accumulated.

Unconditional storage means 241
As shown in FIG. 79, the unconditional storage unit 241 includes either one of the unconditional storage unit 241Aa and the unconditional storage unit 241Ab.

Unconditional storage means 241Aa
The unconditional accumulating unit 241Aa includes an accumulating order changing unit 243 that changes the accumulating order when accumulating the special symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulation control unit 245, and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage means 241Aa has the storage order change means 243 that changes the storage order when the special symbol short-time state is stored based on a predetermined rule, the storage order change means 243 sets the special symbol short-time state. The accumulation order when accumulating can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 241Ab
The unconditional storage unit 241Ab includes a storage order no-change unit 244 that does not change the storage order when storing the special symbol short-time state, and the storage control unit 245 and the like. As described above, since the unconditional storage unit 241Ab has the storage order no-change unit 244 that does not change the storage order when the special symbol short-time state is stored, the storage order no-change unit 244 makes the first order. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the one symbol time-short state.

  In the unconditional storage unit 241Ab, for example, when the release extension flag, the small hit flag, the big hit flag, and the small hit flag are sequentially stored from the top in the profit state storage memory, as shown in FIG. The special symbol time reduction flag for the current special symbol time reduction state may be accumulated on the end side (accumulation order 5) without changing the accumulation order by the non-change means 244. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89, the unconditional accumulating unit 241Aa moves the accumulating order changing unit 243 to move the special symbol shortening flag for the current special symbol shortening state to the head side (accumulating sequence 1) and accumulate it. Or may be randomly accumulated at any position other than the end side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 242 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 242A to 242H shown in FIGS. 79 to 87, and the conditional storage units 242A to 242H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional accumulation means 242A to 242H includes an accumulation order changing means 243 for changing the accumulation order when accumulating the special symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, and an accumulation order when accumulating the special symbol short-time state. The storage order non-changing means 244 is configured to be in the predetermined order without being changed.

  As described above, the conditional storage unit 242 includes the storage order changing unit 243 that changes the order in which the special symbol short-time state is stored based on a predetermined rule. Can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. In addition, the conditional storage means 242 includes the storage order no change means 244 that does not change the order in which the special symbol time saving state is stored, and does not change the order. Accumulation can be performed according to a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when conditions are accumulated conditionally.

As shown in FIG. 80, the first conditional storage unit 242A includes either a conditional storage unit 242Aa or a conditional storage unit 242Ab.
The conditional accumulating unit 242Aa includes an accumulating lottery unit 246 for lottering whether or not the special symbol short-time state is accumulated, the above-described accumulation order changing unit 243, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like. The conditional storage unit 242Ab includes the storage lottery unit 246, the above-described storage order no-change unit 244, the storage control unit 245, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the accumulation lottery means 246 includes a plurality of winning numerical values for accumulation such as “1 to 15”, “30 to 45”,... “270 to 285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the special symbol short-time state is generated), any one of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is stored in any of the winning number tables. Only when the winning numerical value is matched, the current special symbol time-short state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66. However, if the lottery value selected when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when a special symbol short-time state is generated) does not match any winning value of the selected winning value group, The special symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79.

  Thus, when the conditional accumulation means 242Aa has the accumulation lottery means 246 and the accumulation order changing means 243 for changing the order when accumulating the special symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, the special symbol short-time state is displayed. Whether or not to accumulate can be determined by determining the lottery condition by the accumulation lottery means 246, and the accumulation order when the special symbol short-time state is accumulatively conditionally changed is surely changed based on a predetermined rule. This increases the game playability.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 242Ab includes the accumulation lottery means 246 and the accumulation order non-changing means 244 that does not change the accumulation order when accumulating the special symbol short-time state, the predetermined order is not changed. Whether or not the state is to be accumulated can be determined by determining the lottery condition by the accumulation lottery means 246, and it is surely determined without changing the accumulation sequence when the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated. Since the special symbol short-time state can be accumulated in order, the gameability is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 81, the next conditional storage unit 242B is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 242Ba and the conditional storage unit 242Bb.
The conditional storage unit 242Ba includes an external signal determination unit 247 that determines whether or not a signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for storing in a special symbol short-time state, the above-described storage order changing unit 243, and storage. Control means 245 and the like are included. The conditional storage unit 242Bb includes the external signal determination unit 247, the above-described storage order non-change unit 244, the storage control unit 245, and the like.

  In this case, the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. The special symbol short-time state may be accumulated. In addition, an accumulation command device may be separately installed in the hall, and a special symbol short-time state may be accumulated at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by an accumulation command signal input from the accumulation command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 242Ba includes the external signal determination unit 247 and the accumulation order change unit 243 that determine whether or not the signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulation in the special symbol short-time state. , Whether or not to accumulate the special symbol short-time state can be determined by determining the accumulated signal condition input from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determination means 247, and the special symbol short-time state Since the accumulation order when accumulating conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  When the conditional accumulation means 242Bb has the external signal determination means 247 and the accumulation order non-change means 244, the external signal determination means 247 determines whether or not the special symbol short-time state is accumulated. 2. Accumulated signal condition input from outside can be determined and determined, and the special symbol short-time state can be reliably and exactly as specified without changing the storage order when the special symbol short-time state is stored conditionally Can be accumulated, so that the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82, the conditional storage unit 242C is configured by either the conditional storage unit 242Ca or the conditional storage unit 242Cb.
Conditional accumulating means 242Ca includes a firing ball number determining means 248 for determining whether or not the number of fired balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of fired balls for accumulating in a special symbol short-time state; Storage order changing means 243, storage control means 245, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 242Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 248, the accumulation order non-change unit 244, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number-of-balls-determining means 248 stores the number of balls for accumulation from the time of power-on as “200-220”, “400-420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and when a lottery is performed by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state is generated), the number of shot balls is counted. Only when the count value of the current number of fired balls by 71 matches the number of fired balls for accumulation in any of the set groups of fired balls, the current special symbol time-short state is stored in the profit state accumulation means 66. You may make it accumulate | store.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the special symbol short-time state is generated), the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is enabled In this case, the current special symbol short-time state is immediately generated by the variable time shortening unit 79 without being stored in the profit state storage unit 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state is generated). Two numerical values may be drawn internally, and any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may be alternatively activated. .

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the firing ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of game balls to be fired, and the conditional accumulation means 242Ca accumulates the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 in the special symbol short-time state. In the case of having the firing ball number determining means 248 for determining whether or not the number of shot balls to be performed and the accumulation order changing means 243, whether or not to accumulate the special symbol short-time state is determined by the firing ball number determining means 248. Since the number of shot balls can be determined and determined, and the order in which the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 242Cb includes the firing ball number determination means 248 and the accumulation order non-change means 244, whether or not the special symbol short-time state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determination means 248. Because it is possible to determine and determine the number of conditions, and it is possible to reliably store the special symbol short-time state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the special symbol short-time state is stored conditionally , Game play is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83, the conditional storage unit 242D is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 242Da and the conditional storage unit 242Db.
The conditional accumulation means 242Da includes an accumulation number determination means 249 for determining whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting means 69 is an accumulation number for accumulation in a special symbol short-time state, and the above-described accumulation order changing means. 243, accumulation control means 245, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 242Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 249, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 244, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 249, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation, as shown in FIG. When the game is started by the player, the profit states that have not occurred are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66, and when the lottery means 85 wins the prize (when the special symbol short-time state is generated), the accumulated number The current special symbol time-short state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 only when the current accumulation number by the counting unit 69 is “4 or less”.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the prize (when the special symbol short-time state is generated) and the current number of special symbol short-time states stored in the profit state storage means 66 is 5 or more, the special symbol of this time The short time state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variable time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state occurs). One numerical value is drawn internally, and any one of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. It may be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting means 69 for counting the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 242Da accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting means 69 in the special symbol short-time state. In the case of having the accumulation number determination means 249 and the accumulation order change means 243 for determining whether or not the number is the accumulation number, the accumulation number determination means 249 determines whether or not the accumulation number condition is accumulated. In addition, since the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the special symbol short-time state can be changed based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 242Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 249 and the accumulation order non-change unit 244, the accumulation number determination unit 249 determines whether the accumulation number condition is accumulated or not. Since it can be determined and determined, and the special symbol short-time state can be reliably accumulated in the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated, Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84, the conditional storage unit 242E is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 242Ea and the conditional storage unit 242Eb.
The conditional accumulation means 242Ea includes an elapsed time determination means 250 for determining whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulation in the special symbol time-short state, and the accumulation order change described above. A means 243, an accumulation control means 245, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 242Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 250, the accumulation order no change unit 244, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determining means 250 includes an elapsed time for accumulation from the time of power-on "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210",. In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit. When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (at the time of generating the special symbol short-time state), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is The special symbol time-short state of this time may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only when it matches any storage elapsed time in the set elapsed time group.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the special symbol short-time state is generated) and the current elapsed time does not match any of the elapsed time groups that are enabled, The special symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state occurs). One numerical value may be lottery internally, and any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Thus, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional storage means 242Ea is the elapsed time for which the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is accumulated in the special symbol short time state. In the case of having the elapsed time determining means 250 for determining whether or not and the accumulation order changing means 243, whether or not to accumulate the special symbol time-short state is determined by determining the elapsed time condition by the elapsed time determining means 250. In addition, the storage order when the special symbol time-saving state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that the gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 242Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 250 and the accumulation order no change unit 244, whether or not the special symbol time-short state is accumulated is determined by the elapsed time determination unit 250. Since it can be determined and determined, and the special symbol short-time state can be reliably accumulated in the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated, Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85, the conditional storage unit 242F is configured by either the conditional storage unit 242Fa or the conditional storage unit 242Fb.
The conditional accumulating unit 242Fa includes the symbol random number determining unit 251 that determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery unit 86 is a symbol random value that accumulates in the special symbol short-time state, and the above-described accumulation. An order change unit 243 and an accumulation control unit 245 are included. The conditional storage unit 242Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 251, the storage order no change unit 244, the storage control unit 245, and the like.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 251, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the “even number symbol random number value” is set on the manufacturer side as the symbol number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, and the symbol random number value of the symbol pattern when winning by the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when generating the special symbol short-time state) is the set “even-numbered symbol random value” However, the current special symbol time-short state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only.

  However, when a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state is generated) and the symbol random number is an odd number, the current special symbol short-time state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. It is generated immediately by the fluctuation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state is generated). A numerical value is lottery internally, and any one of the random numbers for accumulation corresponding to the lottery value “even number random number value”, “odd number random number value”, “3” among even number random numbers "Multiple of" may be alternatively activated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  In this way, the design random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed special symbol form displayed on the special symbol display means 111 based on the winning of the game ball to the special symbol start means 24 is provided. The conditional storage means 242Fa has a symbol random number determination means 251 that determines whether or not the symbol random number extracted by the symbol random number lottery means 86 is a symbol random number that accumulates in a special symbol short-time state. In the case of having the means 243, whether or not to store the special symbol short-time state can be determined by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determining unit 251, and the special symbol short-time state is stored conditionally. Since the storage order at that time can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional storage means 242Fb includes the symbol random number determination means 251 and the storage order no change means 244, the symbol random number determination means 251 determines whether or not the first symbol short-time state is to be accumulated. In addition, it is possible to reliably store the special symbol time-saving state in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the special symbol time-saving state is stored conditionally. Increases nature.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86, the conditional storage unit 242G is configured by either the conditional storage unit 242Ga or the conditional storage unit 242Gb.
Conditional accumulating means 242Ga includes fluctuation number determining means 252 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations counted by fluctuation number counting means 72 is the number of fluctuations for accumulation in the special symbol short-time state, and the above-described accumulation order change. A means 243, an accumulation control means 245, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 242Gb includes the variation number determination unit 252, the accumulation order non-change unit 244, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation number determination means 252 includes a plurality of variation numbers for accumulation since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  When the game is started by the player, the special ball fluctuates when the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (special The special symbol of this time only when the count value of the current variation count by the variation count counting means 72 matches any variation count of the set variation count group at the time when the symbol short state is generated. The short time state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when the special symbol short-time state is generated), if the current variation count does not match any variation count of the activated variation count group, The special symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the special symbol short-time state is generated). One numerical value may be lottery internally, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  In this way, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 242Ga is the number of fluctuations in which the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 is accumulated in the special symbol short-time state. In the case of having the number-of-changes determining unit 252 for determining whether or not and the accumulation order changing unit 243, the number of times of variation of the first symbol is determined by the number-of-variations determining unit 252 as to whether or not the special symbol short-time state is accumulated The condition can be determined and determined, and the accumulation order when the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, and the gameability is improved.

  In addition, when the conditional accumulation unit 242Gb includes the variation number determination unit 252 and the accumulation order non-change unit 244, the variation number determination unit 252 determines whether or not the special symbol short-time state is accumulated. It is possible to determine and determine the conditions for the number of fluctuations, and it is possible to reliably accumulate special symbol time-short states in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when conditionally accumulates special symbol time-short states. Therefore, gameability is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87, the conditional storage unit 242H is configured by either the conditional storage unit 242Ha or the conditional storage unit 242Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 242Ha includes the symbol form determining unit 253 that determines whether any of the symbol forms stored in the symbol form storing unit 75 is a symbol form that accumulates in the special symbol short-time state. An accumulation order changing unit 243, an accumulation control hand 225, and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 242Hb includes the symbol form determination unit 253, the accumulation order no change unit 244, the accumulation control unit 245, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol form determining means 253 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. Since the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state has occurred in the past is stored in order in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by lottery by the lottery means 85 (this special In the case of generating a symbol short-time state), when the previous jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75, or the last two or more previous jackpot symbol pattern matches with any of the accumulation jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. However, the current special symbol time-short state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66 only.

  However, even when winning by lottery means 85 (when a special symbol short-time state is generated), if the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols does not match any of the accumulating jackpot symbols Is generated immediately by the variation time shortening means 79 without the special symbol short time state being accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  As described above, the special symbol mode of the special symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 242Ha includes the symbol mode. When any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 has the symbol aspect determination means 253 for determining whether or not the symbol pattern is accumulated in the special symbol short-time state, and the accumulation order changing means 243, Whether or not the special symbol short-time state is to be accumulated can be determined by determining the symbol pattern condition based on the symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage unit 75 by the symbol pattern determining unit 253, and the special symbol. The accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the time-short state can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, and the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 242Ab includes the symbol form determination means 253 and the accumulation order no change means 244, the symbol form determination means 253 determines whether or not the special symbol short-time state is to be accumulated. 75 can be determined and determined on the basis of the symbol mode stored in 75, and without fail to change the accumulation sequence when the special symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated, the predetermined order is ensured. Since the special symbol short-time state can be accumulated on the street, the gameability is enhanced.

Normal symbol variation time shortening storage means 260 (see FIGS. 90 to 99).
The normal symbol variation time shortening accumulation means 260 accumulates the normal symbol short time state. As shown in FIG. 90, the normal symbol short time state unconditionally accumulates the normal symbol short time state and the normal symbol short time state. It has any one of conditional storage means 262 that stores under conditions.

  As described above, when the normal symbol variation time reduction accumulating means 260 includes the unconditional accumulating means 261 that unconditionally accumulates the normal symbol short time state, the normal symbol short time state is immediately generated by the unconditional accumulation means 261. Without any condition, and can be reliably accumulated. In addition, when the normal symbol variation time reduction accumulating means 260 has the conditional accumulating means 262 that conditionally accumulates the normal symbol short time state, the conditional symbol accumulating means 262 does not generate the normal symbol short time state immediately. It can be reliably accumulated.

Unconditional storage means 261
As shown in FIG. 91, the unconditional storage unit 261 includes either one of an unconditional storage unit 261Aa and an unconditional storage unit 261Ab.

Unconditional storage means 261Aa
The unconditional accumulating unit 261Aa includes an accumulating order changing unit 263 that changes the accumulating order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, an accumulation control unit 265, and the like. Thus, since the unconditional storage means 261Aa has the storage order change means 263 that changes the storage order when the normal symbol time-short state is stored based on a predetermined rule, the storage order change means 263 sets the normal symbol time-short state. The accumulation order when accumulating can be surely changed based on a predetermined rule.

Unconditional storage means 261Ab
The unconditional storage unit 261Ab includes a storage order no-change unit 264 that does not change the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored, and the storage control unit 265 and the like. In this way, the unconditional storage means 261Ab has the storage order no-change means 264 that does not change the storage order when the normal symbol time-short state is stored, and does not change the storage order. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state.

  In the unconditional storage means 261Ab, for example, when an open extension flag, a jackpot flag, a special symbol time reduction flag, and a probability variation flag are sequentially stored from the top in the profit state storage memory, as shown in FIG. The normal symbol time / short flag for the current normal symbol time / short state may be accumulated on the end side (accumulation sequence 5) without changing the accumulation sequence by the non-order changing means 264. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 101, the unconditional accumulating unit 261Aa moves the normal symbol short time flag for the current normal symbol short time state to the head side (accumulation order 1) and stores it by the accumulation order changing unit 263. Alternatively, it may be randomly accumulated at any position other than the end side.

  Next, the conditional storage unit 262 includes any one of the eight types of conditional storage units 262A to 262H shown in FIGS. 91 to 99, and the conditional storage units 262A to 262H will be sequentially described. However, each of the conditional accumulation means 262A to 262H includes an accumulation order changing means 263 that changes the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, and an accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state. The storage order non-changing means 264 is configured to change the storage order in the predetermined order.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 262 includes the accumulation order changing unit 263 that changes the order in which the normal symbol shortening state is accumulated based on the predetermined rule. The accumulation order when accumulating under conditions can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule. The conditional storage means 262 includes the storage order no-change means 264 that does not change the order in which the normal symbol short-time state is stored, and does not change the order. Accumulation can be performed in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating time-short states.

As shown in FIG. 92, the first conditional storage unit 262A includes either a conditional storage unit 262Aa or a conditional storage unit 262Ab.
The conditional accumulating means 262Aa includes an accumulating lottery means 266 for lottering whether or not to accumulate the normal symbol short-time state, the accumulating order changing means 263, the accumulating control means 265, and the like. The conditional storage unit 262Ab includes the storage lottery unit 266, the storage order no change unit 264, the storage control unit 265, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the accumulation lottery means 266 includes a plurality of winning numerical values for accumulation such as “1 to 15”, “30 to 45”,... “270 to 285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When a lottery is made by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated), any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted, and the specified extracted value is stored in any winning numerical value table. Only when the winning numerical value is met, the current symbol short time state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66. However, when the lottery value selected by the lottery means 85 (when generating a normal symbol short-time state) does not match any winning value in the winning value group that is activated, The normal symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79.

  As described above, when the conditional accumulation means 262Aa has the accumulation lottery means 266 and the accumulation order changing means 263 for changing the order of accumulating the normal symbol short-time state based on a predetermined rule, the normal symbol short-time state is displayed. Whether or not to accumulate can be determined by determining the lottery condition by the accumulation lottery means 266, and the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time condition conditionally is surely changed based on a predetermined rule. This increases the game playability.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 262Ab has the accumulation lottery means 266 and the accumulation order non-change means 264 that does not change the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state and does not change the accumulation order, the normal symbol short-time Whether or not the state is to be accumulated can be determined by determining the lottery conditions by the accumulation lottery means 266, and it is ensured without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short-time state conditionally. Since the normal symbol short-time state can be accumulated in a predetermined order, the gameability is enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 93, the next conditional storage unit 262B is configured by either the conditional storage unit 262Ba or the conditional storage unit 262Bb.
The conditional accumulation means 262Ba includes an external signal determination means 267 for determining whether or not a signal input from outside the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulation in a normal symbol short-time state, the accumulation order changing means 263 and the accumulation described above. Control means 265 and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 262Bb includes the external signal determination unit 267, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like.

  In this case, the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is, for example, an accumulation command signal from an island computer provided on the hall side, and the accumulation command signal is input irregularly from the island computer. The normal symbol short-time state may be accumulated. Alternatively, a storage command device may be separately installed in the hall, and a normal symbol short-time state may be stored at different timings for each pachinko machine 2 by a storage command signal input from the storage command device.

  As described above, the conditional accumulation unit 262Ba includes the external signal determination unit 267 and the accumulation order change unit 263 that determine whether or not the signal input from the outside of the pachinko machine 2 is a signal for accumulation in the normal symbol short-time state. , Whether or not to accumulate the normal symbol short-time state can be determined by determining the accumulated signal condition input from outside the pachinko machine 2 by the external signal determination means 267, and the normal symbol short-time state Since the accumulation order when accumulating conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 262Bb includes the external signal determination means 267 and the accumulation order non-change means 264, the external signal determination means 267 determines whether or not the normal symbol time-short state is accumulated. It is possible to determine and determine the accumulation signal condition input from the normal signal, and to ensure that the normal symbol short-time state can be determined according to the predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally. Since it can accumulate | store, gameability increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94, the conditional storage unit 262C is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 262Ca and the conditional storage unit 262Cb.
Conditional accumulating means 262Ca includes a firing ball number determining means 268 that determines whether or not the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is the number of firing balls that normally accumulates in a short time state of symbols. Storage order changing means 263, storage control means 265, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 262Cb includes the number of shot balls determination unit 268, the accumulation order no-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the number of shot balls for accumulation from the time of power-on is indicated in the shot ball number judging means 268 as “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player and the number of game balls fired by the player is increased and the winning ball is won by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated), the shot ball count means Only when the count value of the current number of fired balls by 71 matches the number of fired balls for accumulation in any of the set fired ball number groups, the current normal symbol short-time state is stored in the profit state accumulation means 66. You may make it accumulate | store.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated), the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is enabled In this case, the current short time state of the normal symbol is immediately generated by the variable time shortening unit 79 without being stored in the profit state storage unit 66. Here, as shown in FIG. 24B, any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated). Two numerical values may be drawn internally, and any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may be alternatively activated. .

  By the way, the number of shot balls for accumulation shown in the table of FIG. 24 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the firing ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of game balls fired, and the conditional accumulation means 262Ca accumulates the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 in the normal symbol short-time state. In the case of having the firing ball number judging means 268 for judging whether or not the number of firing balls is to be performed and the accumulation order changing means 263, the number of firing ball judging means 268 determines whether or not to accumulate the normal symbol short-time state. Since the number of shot balls can be determined and determined, and the order in which the normal symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 262Cb includes the firing ball number determination means 268 and the accumulation order non-change means 264, whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is accumulated is determined by the firing ball number determination means 268. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, and the normal symbol short-time state can be reliably stored in a predetermined order without changing the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally. Therefore, gameability is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95, the conditional storage unit 262D is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 262Da and the conditional storage unit 262Db.
The conditional accumulation unit 262Da includes an accumulation number determination unit 269 that determines whether or not the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is an accumulation number that performs accumulation in a normal symbol short-time state, and the above-described accumulation order changing unit. 263, storage control means 265, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 262Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 269, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like.

  For example, in the accumulation number determination means 269, as shown in FIG. 25A, “4 or less” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulation number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, the profit states that have not occurred are sequentially stored in the profit state storage means 66, and when the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated), the accumulated number Only when the current accumulation number by the counting means 69 is “4 or less”, the current normal symbol time-short state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated) and the current number of normal symbol short-time states stored in the profit state storage means 66 is 5 or more, the current normal symbol The short time state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variable time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state occurs). One numerical value is drawn internally, and any one of the accumulation numbers “1 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”, etc. according to the lottery value is selectively activated. It may be.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 for counting the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional accumulation unit 262Da accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 in the normal symbol short time state. In the case of having the accumulated number judging means 269 for judging whether or not it is the accumulated number and the accumulation order changing means 263, the accumulated number judging means 269 judges whether or not the accumulated number condition is accumulated. In addition, the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally can be reliably changed based on a predetermined rule, so that gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 262Db includes the accumulation number determination unit 269 and the accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation number determination unit 269 determines whether or not the accumulation number condition is accumulated. Since it can be determined and determined, and the normal symbol short-time state can be stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally, the gameability Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96, the conditional storage unit 262E is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 262Ea and the conditional storage unit 262Eb.
The conditional accumulating means 262Ea includes an elapsed time determining means 270 that determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is an elapsed time for accumulating the normal symbol time-short state, and the above-described accumulation order change. Means 263, accumulation control means 265, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 262Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 270, the above-described accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the elapsed time determination means 270 includes an accumulation elapsed time “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”... In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol time-short state is generated), the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is Only when the accumulated elapsed time in one of the set elapsed time groups is matched, the current normal symbol time-short state may be accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66.

  However, if the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated) and the current elapsed time does not match any of the elapsed time groups that are enabled, The normal symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state occurs). One numerical value may be lottery internally, and any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 26 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 262Ea is the elapsed time for which the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time timing means 70 is accumulated in the normal symbol short time state. In the case of having the elapsed time determining means 270 and the accumulation order changing means 263 for determining whether or not the normal symbol time-short state is to be accumulated, the elapsed time determining means 270 determines the elapsed time condition to determine. In addition, the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation unit 262Eb includes the elapsed time determination unit 270 and the accumulation order non-change unit 264, the elapsed time determination unit 270 determines whether or not the normal symbol time-short state is to be accumulated. Since it can be determined and determined, and the normal symbol short-time state can be stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally, the gameability Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97, the conditional storage unit 262F is configured by one of the conditional storage unit 262Fa and the conditional storage unit 262Fb.
The conditional storage means 262Fa determines whether or not the symbol random value extracted by the symbol random number lottery means 86 including the random number generation means 61 and the random number extraction means 62 is a symbol random value for storing a normal symbol short-time state. It has a design random number judging means 271 for judging, the above-mentioned accumulation order changing means 263, an accumulation control means 265 and the like. The conditional storage unit 262Fb includes the symbol random number determination unit 271 and the above-described storage order no-change unit 264, storage control unit 265, and the like.

  For example, in the symbol random number determination means 271, as shown in FIG. 27A, “even number random number value” is set on the maker side as the symbol number for accumulation. When the game is started by the player, and the symbol random value of the symbol pattern when winning by the lottery by the lottery means 85 (when generating a normal symbol short-time state) is the set “even-numbered symbol random value” Only in this case, the current normal symbol short time state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when the lottery means 85 wins (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated) and the symbol random number is an odd number, the current normal symbol short-time state is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66. It is generated immediately by the fluctuation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the accumulation design random number value is limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”of even-numbered design random number values”, or as shown in FIG. 27 (c). In addition, “odd design random number value” is set as the design symbol random value, or, as shown in FIG. May be limited to “a multiple of“ 3 ”or“ 5 ”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short time state is generated). A numerical value is lottery internally, and any one of the random numbers for accumulation corresponding to the lottery value “even number random number value”, “odd number random number value”, “3” among even number random numbers "Multiple of" may be alternatively activated. By the way, the symbol random number values shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D may be alternatively activated by the manufacturer, or may be selected by an internal lottery or by the player. It may be possible to make it effective.

  Thus, based on the winning of the game ball to the normal symbol starting means 24, the symbol random number lottery means 86 for performing random number lottery to determine the changed normal symbol mode displayed on the normal symbol display means 112 is provided. The conditional storage means 262Fa includes a symbol random number determination means 271 that determines whether or not the symbol random number extracted by the symbol random number lottery means 86 is a symbol random number that accumulates in a normal symbol short-time state, and a storage order change. In the case of having the means 263, it is possible to determine whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is to be stored by determining the symbol random number condition by the symbol random number determination unit 271 and to store the normal symbol short-time state conditionally. Since the storage order at that time can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is enhanced.

  Further, when the conditional storage means 262Fb includes the symbol random number determination means 271 and the storage order no change means 264, the symbol random number determination means 271 determines whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is to be stored. Since it can be determined and determined, and the normal symbol short-time state can be stored in the prescribed order without changing the storage order when the normal symbol short-time state is stored conditionally, the gameability Will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98, the conditional storage unit 262G is configured by either the conditional storage unit 262Ga or the conditional storage unit 262Gb.
The conditional accumulation means 262Ga includes a fluctuation number determination means 272 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations counted by the fluctuation number counting means 72 is the number of fluctuations in which normal symbol short-time state accumulation is performed, and the accumulation order change described above. Means 263, accumulation control means 265, and the like. The conditional accumulation unit 262Gb includes the variation number determination unit 272, the accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the variation number determination means 272 includes a plurality of variation numbers for accumulation since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  When a game is started by a player, and a game ball wins the normal symbol starting means 24, the normal symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the lottery means 85 wins the lottery (normal) Only when the count value of the current fluctuation count by the fluctuation count counting means 72 coincides with one of the fluctuation counts of the set fluctuation count group at the time when the symbol short-time state is generated) The short time state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, when a lottery by the lottery means 85 is won (when a normal symbol short-time state is generated), if the current number of fluctuations does not match any number of fluctuations in the activated fluctuation number group, The normal symbol short time state of this time is not accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 but is immediately generated by the variation time shortening means 79. Here, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), any one of “0 to 999” is selected when the power is turned on or when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85 (when the normal symbol short-time state is generated). One numerical value may be lottery internally, and any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively.

  By the way, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 28 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery. Furthermore, the table-like number of fluctuations for accumulation shown in FIG. 28 is the number of fluctuations from the end of jackpot according to a predetermined symbol form such as “2, 2, 2”, “7, 7, 7”, etc. Also good. In this case, the tabulated number of changes may be alternatively validated by the manufacturer, or alternatively may be alternatively validated by internal lottery.

  In this way, the fluctuation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol is provided, and the conditional accumulation means 262Ga is the number of fluctuations in which the fluctuation number counted by the fluctuation number counting means 72 is accumulated in the normal symbol short time state. In the case of having the variation number determination unit 272 for determining whether or not the symbol is stored and the accumulation order changing unit 263, whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is to be accumulated is determined by the variation number determination unit 272 according to the variation number condition for special symbols. Further, the storage order when the normal symbol time-short state is stored conditionally can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, so that the gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 262Gb includes the fluctuation number determination means 272 and the accumulation order non-change means 264, whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is accumulated is determined by the fluctuation number determination means by the fluctuation number determination means. Since it is possible to determine and determine the conditions, and it is possible to reliably accumulate the normal symbol short time state in a predetermined order without changing the accumulation order when accumulating the normal symbol short time state conditionally, Increases playability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99, the conditional storage unit 262H is configured by either the conditional storage unit 262Ha or the conditional storage unit 262Hb.
The conditional accumulating unit 262Ha includes a symbol state determining unit 273 that determines whether or not any of the symbol aspects stored in the symbol aspect storing unit 75 is a symbol aspect that accumulates in the normal symbol short-time state. An accumulation order changing unit 263, an accumulation control hand 225, and the like are included. The conditional accumulation unit 262Hb includes the symbol form determination unit 273, the accumulation order non-change unit 264, the accumulation control unit 265, and the like described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the symbol form determining means 273 includes “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”, “5, 5, 5”, “7” , 7, 7 ”,“ 9, 9, 9 ”are set on the manufacturer side. Since the big win symbol mode when the big hit state has occurred in the past is stored in order in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the game is started by the player and won by the lottery means 85 (this time normal In the case of generating a symbol short-time state), when the previous jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75, or the last two or more previous jackpot symbol pattern matches with any of the accumulation jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. Only in this case, the current normal symbol short time state may be stored in the profit state storage means 66.

  However, even if the lottery means 85 wins the game (when a normal symbol short-time state is generated), the previous, previous two times, or three or more previous jackpot symbols does not match any of the accumulating jackpot symbols Is generated immediately by the variation time shortening means 79 without the normal symbol short time state being accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66. Here, the accumulating jackpot symbol pattern shown in FIG. 29 may be set while changing to a jackpot symbol pattern having the most types among a plurality of jackpot symbol patterns stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75. .

  As described above, the specific symbol mode of the normal symbol includes a plurality of types of symbol modes, and includes the symbol mode storage unit 75 for storing the symbol mode when a big hit state has occurred in the past. The conditional accumulation unit 262Ha includes the symbol mode. When any of the symbol forms stored in the storage means 75 has a symbol aspect determination means 273 for determining whether or not the symbol pattern is accumulated in the normal symbol short-time state, and an accumulation order changing means 263, Whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is to be accumulated can be determined by determining the symbol pattern condition based on the symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage unit 75 by the symbol pattern determining unit 273, and the normal symbol can be determined. Since the accumulation order when conditionally accumulating the short-time state can be changed reliably based on a predetermined rule, gameability is improved.

  Further, when the conditional accumulation means 262Ab includes the symbol form determination means 273 and the accumulation order no change means 264, the symbol form determination means 273 determines whether or not the normal symbol short-time state is to be accumulated. 75 can be determined and determined based on the symbol mode stored in 75, and without changing the accumulation sequence when the normal symbol short-time state is conditionally accumulated, the predetermined order is ensured. Since the normal symbol short time state can be accumulated on the street, the gameability is enhanced.

  Next, the accumulation cancellation unit 67 that cancels the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation unit 66 and enables the profit state to be generated by the profit state generation unit 76 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. However, it is assumed that the accumulation canceling means 67 repeatedly operates every predetermined minute time (for example, 2 mse, several seconds).

  As described above, since the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation unit 66 is canceled and the accumulation state release unit 67 that enables the profit state to be generated by the profit state generation unit 76 is provided. Since the profit state is released by the accumulation release unit 67, the released profit state can be generated by the profit state generation unit 76 at the time of release.

  The accumulation cancellation unit 67 includes an accumulation cancellation determination unit 133 that determines that the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation unit 66 is canceled when the accumulation cancellation condition is satisfied, and an accumulation cancellation condition setting unit that sets the accumulation cancellation condition. 134 and cancellation content changing means 135 for changing the cancellation content of the profit state to cancel the accumulation.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation unit 67 includes the accumulation cancellation determination unit 133 that determines to cancel the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state storage unit 66 when the accumulation cancellation condition is satisfied. It can be determined to reliably cancel the accumulation of profit status due to. In addition, since the accumulation cancellation unit 67 includes the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, it is possible to set the accumulation cancellation condition for canceling the accumulation of the profit state.

Accumulation cancellation determination means 133 (see FIGS. 103 to 108).
The accumulation cancellation determination unit 133 includes a lottery cancellation lottery unit 280 for lottering whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state, and a shot ball number determination unit for determining whether or not it is the number of shot balls for canceling the accumulation of the profit state. 290, an accumulation number determination means 300 for determining whether or not it is the accumulation number for canceling the accumulation of profit status, and an elapsed time determination means 310 for determining whether or not it is an elapsed time for canceling the accumulation of profit status Any of the pattern mode determination means 320 for determining whether or not the stop pattern mode for canceling the accumulation of profit status and the variation count determination unit 330 for determining whether or not the number of variations for canceling the accumulation of profit status Or have one.

Accumulation cancellation lottery means 280
The accumulation cancellation lottery means 280 is a lottery for determining whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the accumulation state. As shown in FIG. 103, the high probability setting means 281, the low probability setting means 282, and the intermediate probability setting means 283. And a lottery determination control means 284 and an accumulation release control means 285.

  The high probability setting means 281 sets the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state to a high probability in the predetermined first state, for example, in the probability variation state or in the variation time reduction state. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the high probability setting means 281 has a large number of high probability accumulation cancellation winning numerical values “1-15”, “30-45”,. ”As a table for multiple winning numerical groups, and one of the winning numerical groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated alternatively.

  The lottery determination control means 284 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state with the high probability set by the high probability setting means 281. The profit state is canceled by 285. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the accumulation is canceled with a probability of about 50% (150/300) as shown in FIG. 109 (a). Release the accumulation with probability (120/300). Here, the high probability setting means may be operated when the accumulated number of profit states is a predetermined number or more. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, two) or more of jackpot states are accumulated, or when a probability variation state is accumulated for a predetermined number (for example, two) or more, lottery may be performed with high probability. .

  Thus, since the accumulation cancellation lottery means 280 has the high probability setting means 281 for setting the lottery probability for releasing the accumulation of the profit state to a high probability in the predetermined first state, the high probability setting means 281. Thus, the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state can be set with a high probability, and the gameability is enhanced.

  The low probability setting means 282 sets the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state to a low value lower than the high probability in the predetermined second state, for example, when the number of fluctuations after the accumulation is canceled is small. Set to probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the low probability setting means 282 has a large number of low probability accumulation cancellation winning numbers “1-7”, “30-38”,. ”As a table for multiple winning numerical groups, and one of the winning numerical groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated alternatively.

  In this case, a low probability of 75/300 (about 22.5%) is set. Then, the lottery determination control means 284 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the accumulation of profit status using the low probability table set by the low probability setting means 282. The profit state is canceled by.

  Thus, since the accumulation cancellation lottery means 280 has the low probability setting means 282 for setting the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state to a low probability lower than the high probability in the predetermined second state, By this low probability setting means 282, the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state can be set to a low probability lower than the high probability, and the gameability is enhanced.

  The intermediate probability setting means 283 sets the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state between the high probability and the low probability in the predetermined third state, for example, when two or more jackpot states are accumulated. Set to the intermediate probability of. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), a plurality of winning cancellation numbers such as “1 to 10”, “30 to 40”,... A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  In this case, a low probability of 100/300 (about 33.3%) is set. Then, the lottery determination control means 284 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state based on the intermediate probability table set by the intermediate probability setting means 283, and when releasing the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control means 285. The profit state is canceled by.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation lottery means 280 sets the intermediate probability setting means 283 for setting the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state to an intermediate probability between the high probability and the low probability in the predetermined third state. Therefore, the intermediate probability setting means 283 can set the lottery probability for canceling the accumulation of the profit state to an intermediate probability between the high probability and the low probability, and the gameability is enhanced.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation determining unit 133 included in the accumulation cancellation unit 67 includes the accumulation cancellation lottery unit 280 for lottering whether to cancel the accumulation of the profit state. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state. The lottery conditions can be determined and determined by the accumulation cancellation lottery means 280.

Number of shot balls determining means 290
As shown in FIG. 104, the firing ball number determining means 290 is configured by either one of the firing ball number determining means 290A and the firing ball number determining means 290B.
The firing ball number determining means 290A includes a released firing ball number storage means 291, an accumulation cancellation determination control means 292, an accumulation cancellation control means 293, and the like.

  The release ball number storage unit 291 includes a release ball number storage memory or the like in the RAM 45c, and stores the number of shot balls preset by the manufacturer. For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the number of firing balls for accumulation cancellation after power-on is “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... It is set in advance as a table so that any one of the groups of shot balls can be activated selectively on the manufacturer side, or any one can be changed appropriately on the hall side to enable it alternatively. It has become. Here, the number of shot balls preset by the manufacturer may be the number of shot balls since the end of the previous jackpot.

  When the game by the player is started, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and the count value of the current number of shot balls by the shot ball count means 71 is periodically counted by the accumulation cancellation determination control means 292. Is determined to match the number of balls for accumulation in any of the set ball number groups, and the accumulation cancellation control means 293 cancels the accumulation of the profit state only when they match. May be. However, if the number of shot balls by the shot ball number counting means 71 does not match any number of accumulated shot balls in the activated shot number group, the accumulation of the profit state is not performed.

  The firing ball number determination means 290B includes an accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 having a cancellation firing ball number lottery means 341, an accumulation cancellation determination control means 292, an accumulation cancellation control means 293, and the like. As shown in FIG. 102, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes one of a one-stage lottery unit 340 (see FIG. 115) and a two-stage lottery unit 350 (see FIG. 116).

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes the one-stage lottery unit 340 that performs the one-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition. Therefore, the one-stage lottery unit 340 sets the accumulation cancellation condition by the one-stage lottery. And playability is enhanced. Further, since the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 has a two-stage lottery means 350 for performing a two-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, the two-stage lottery means 350 can set the accumulation cancellation condition by a two-stage lottery. Yes, and playability increases.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the one-stage lottery means 340 has a release ball number lottery means 341. Therefore, when the one-stage lottery means 340 is used, the number of released firing balls is selected. In this case, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the power is turned on and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, Any of the fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  Similarly, when the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 292 determines to cancel the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control unit 293 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. By the way, the number of balls for accumulation release tabulated in FIG. 110 may be the total number of shot balls since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, the number-of-balls counting unit 71 for counting the number of game balls to be fired is provided, and the one-stage lottery unit 340 determines the number of balls to be accumulated as a storage cancellation condition for canceling the accumulation of the profit state by lottery. Since the release firing ball number lottery means 341 is provided, the release release ball number lottery means 341 can determine the accumulation release condition on the basis of the number of release fired balls by lottery, and the gameability is improved.

  On the other hand, when the two-stage lottery means 350 is used, as shown in FIG. 116, the lottery table selection means 351 included in the two-stage lottery means 350 includes a high-probability table with a high lottery probability for cancellation and a lottery for cancellation. One of the low probability tables with low probability is included. For example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs and the high probability table shown in FIG. 117 is used, first, by a first stage lottery, a plurality of accumulated release firing ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420 ”,... Is selected according to the accumulation cancellation probability.

  In the subsequent second stage lottery, the number of shot balls in the selected shot ball number group is specified. That is, when the specified number of fired balls is determined as the number of ceiling balls, and the number of shot balls of the shot ball number counting means 71 reaches the number of ceiling balls, the accumulation of profit state is canceled. Similarly, when a low probability table (not shown) is used, one shot ball number is specified by the first stage lottery and the second stage lottery, and the shot ball of the shot ball number counting means 71 is specified. When the number reaches the number of ceiling balls, the profit state accumulation is canceled.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the accumulation release determining means 133 cancels the accumulation of the profit state when the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 is Since it has the firing ball number judging means 290 for judging whether or not it is the number of firing balls to be determined, it is determined by judging the firing ball number condition by the firing ball number judging means 290 whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state. can do.

  Furthermore, in this way, the two-stage lottery means 350 selects the lottery table used when performing the first lottery and the second lottery from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities set in advance. Since the means 351 is provided, the lottery table selecting means 351 can select a lottery table to be drawn in two stages from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities, and the gameability is improved.

Accumulated number determination means 300
As shown in FIG. 105, the accumulated number determining means 300 is configured by either the accumulated number determining means 300A or the accumulated number determining means 300B.
The accumulation number determination unit 300A includes a cancellation accumulation number storage unit 301, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 302, an accumulation cancellation control unit 303, and the like.

  The solution cancellation accumulated number storage means 301 is composed of an accumulated number storage memory or the like in the RAM 45c, and stores the accumulated number preset by the manufacturer. For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), for example, “4 or less” is set on the maker side regardless of the accumulation type as the accumulation canceling accumulation number. When the game is started by the player, it is periodically determined by the accumulation cancellation determination control means 302 whether or not the current accumulation number by the accumulation number counting means 69 matches the set “4 or less”. Only in such a case, the accumulation cancellation control means 303 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. However, if the accumulated number by the accumulated number counting means 69 is not “4 or less” set, the profit state accumulation is not canceled. Further, the determination may be made with a predetermined number such as “4”, or the number of accumulation for the accumulation cancellation determination may be made different for each accumulation type.

  The accumulation number determination unit 300B includes an accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 having a cancellation accumulation number lottery unit 342, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 302, an accumulation cancellation control unit 303, and the like. As shown in FIG. 102, the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 is composed of one of a one-stage lottery means 340 and a two-stage lottery means 350 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes the one-stage lottery unit 340 that performs the one-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition. Therefore, the one-stage lottery unit 340 sets the accumulation cancellation condition by the one-stage lottery. And playability is enhanced. Further, since the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 has a two-stage lottery means 350 for performing a two-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, the two-stage lottery means 350 can set the accumulation cancellation condition by a two-stage lottery. Yes, and playability increases.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the one-stage lottery means 340 has a release accumulation number lottery means 342. Therefore, when the one-stage lottery means 340 is used, the release accumulation number lottery means 342 is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the power is turned on and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85, regardless of the type of profit state to be released next, “0 to 999”. Any one of the numbers is randomly drawn, and one of the accumulation number groups “0 to 1”, “2 to 3”, “4 or less”,... According to the lottery value is selected. You may make it validate effectively.

  Similarly, if the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 302 determines to cancel the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control unit 303 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. By the way, for each type of profit state, that is, for each jackpot or small hit, prepare the number of accumulation cancellation accumulation tabulated as shown in FIG. It may be determined by lottery whether to cancel the accumulation.

  As described above, the first-stage lottery unit 340 includes a storage number counting unit 69 that counts the number of stored current profit states, and the one-stage lottery unit 340 cancels the number of released storages as a storage cancellation condition for canceling the storage of profit states. Since the storage number lottery means 342 is provided, the release cancellation number lottery means 342 can determine the storage release condition based on the release accumulation number by lottery, and the gameability is improved.

  On the other hand, when the two-stage lottery means 350 is used, as shown in FIG. 116, the lottery table selection means 351 included in the two-stage lottery means 350 includes a high-probability table with a high lottery probability for cancellation and a lottery for cancellation. One of the low probability tables with low probability is included. For example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs and the high probability table shown in FIG. 118 is used, first, a plurality of accumulation number groups “0 to 1”, “2 to 3”, Any one of “4 or less”,... Is selected according to the accumulation cancellation probability.

  In the subsequent second-stage lottery, one accumulated number in the selected one accumulated number group is specified. That is, when the specified accumulation number is determined as the ceiling accumulation number and the accumulation number of the accumulation number counting means 69 reaches the ceiling accumulation number, the accumulation of the profit state is canceled. Similarly, when a low probability table (not shown) is used, one release accumulation number is specified by the first stage lottery and the second stage lottery, and the accumulation number of the accumulation number counting means 69 is specified. When the number reaches the ceiling accumulation number, the profit state accumulation is canceled.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the accumulation cancellation determination unit 133 accumulates the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 to cancel the accumulation of the profit state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state by determining the accumulated number condition by the accumulated number determining unit 300.

  Furthermore, in this way, the two-stage lottery means 350 selects the lottery table used when performing the first lottery and the second lottery from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities set in advance. Since the means 351 is included, the lottery table selecting means 351 can select a lottery table to be drawn in two stages from among a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities, and the gameability is improved.

Elapsed time determination means 310
As shown in FIG. 106, the elapsed time determination unit 310 is configured by either the elapsed time determination unit 310A or the elapsed time determination unit 310B.
The elapsed time determination unit 310A includes a release elapsed time storage unit 311, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 312, an accumulation cancellation control unit 313, and the like.

  The cancellation elapsed time storage means 311 includes an elapsed time storage memory or the like in the RAM 45c, and stores an elapsed time preset by the manufacturer. For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), a plurality of elapsed times such as “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,... Tables are set in advance in the time group, and any one of the elapsed time groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be alternatively activated. It is like that.

  When the game by the player is started, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and the current elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is periodically set by any one of the set elapsed time groups by the accumulation cancellation determination control means 312. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time is matched, and the accumulation cancellation control means 313 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state only when the elapsed time is matched. However, if the elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 does not coincide with any accumulated elapsed time in the validated elapsed time group, the profit state accumulation is not canceled.

  The elapsed time determination unit 310B includes an accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 having an cancellation elapsed time lottery unit 343, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 312, an accumulation cancellation control unit 313, and the like. As shown in FIG. 102, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes one of a one-stage lottery unit 340 and a two-stage lottery unit 350 (see FIG. 116).

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes the one-stage lottery unit 340 that performs the one-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition. Therefore, the one-stage lottery unit 340 sets the accumulation cancellation condition by the one-stage lottery. And playability is enhanced. Further, since the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 has a two-stage lottery means 350 for performing a two-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, the two-stage lottery means 350 can set the accumulation cancellation condition by a two-stage lottery. Yes, and playability increases.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the one-stage lottery means 340 has a release elapsed time lottery means 343. Therefore, when the one-stage lottery means 340 is used, the release elapsed time lottery means 343 is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the power is turned on and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, Any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,... According to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  Similarly, when the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 312 determines to cancel the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control unit 313 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for accumulation shown in FIG. 112 may be the elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot, the elapsed time (accumulation time) from the accumulation of the first profit state, It may be the elapsed time from when the accumulation is released.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the one-stage lottery means 340 determines the cancellation elapsed time as the accumulation cancellation condition for canceling the accumulation of the profit state by lottery. Thus, the cancellation elapsed time lottery means 343 can determine the accumulation cancellation condition based on the cancellation elapsed time by the lottery, and the gameability is improved.

  On the other hand, when the two-stage lottery means 350 is used, as shown in FIG. 116, the lottery table selection means 351 included in the two-stage lottery means 350 includes a high-probability table with a high lottery probability for cancellation and a lottery for cancellation. One of the low probability tables with low probability is included. For example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs and the high probability table shown in FIG. 119 is used, first, a plurality of elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, One elapsed time group of “180 to 210”... Is selected according to the accumulation cancellation probability.

  In the subsequent second stage lottery, one elapsed time in the selected one elapsed time group is specified. That is, the specified elapsed time is determined as the ceiling elapsed time, and when the elapsed time of the elapsed time measuring means 70 reaches the ceiling elapsed time, the accumulation of the profit state is canceled. Similarly, when a low probability table (not shown) is used, one elapsed time for release is specified by the first stage lottery and the second stage lottery, and the elapsed time of the elapsed time measuring means 70 is determined. When the ceiling elapsed time is reached, the accumulation of profit status is canceled.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for counting the elapsed time is provided, and the accumulation cancellation determining means 133 determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is the elapsed time for canceling the accumulation of the profit state. Therefore, the elapsed time determination unit 310 can determine whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state by determining the elapsed time condition.

  Furthermore, in this way, the two-stage lottery means 350 selects the lottery table used when performing the first lottery and the second lottery from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities set in advance. Since the means 351 is included, the lottery table selecting means 351 can select a lottery table to be drawn in two stages from among a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities, and the gameability is improved.

Symbol appearance determining means 320
As shown in FIG. 107, the symbol mode determination unit 320 is configured by either one of the symbol mode determination unit 320A and the symbol mode determination unit 320B.
The symbol pattern determination unit 320A includes a cancellation symbol pattern storage unit 321, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 322, an accumulation cancellation control unit 323, and the like.

  The release symbol form storage means 321 includes a symbol form storage memory or the like in the RAM 45c, and stores a symbol form (stop symbol form) preset by the manufacturer. For example, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), “1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5”, “7,7,7” "," 9, 9, 9 "are set on the manufacturer side. When the game by the player is started and the jackpot state has occurred in the past, the jackpot symbol mode is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75.

  Therefore, whether or not the stop symbol mode in which the fluctuation of the special symbol this time has been stopped periodically by the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 322 matches any jackpot symbol mode stored in the cancellation symbol mode storage unit 321. Only when it is determined and matched, the accumulation cancellation control means 323 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. However, in the case where the fluctuation stop symbol of the special symbol this time does not match any of the activated symbol patterns, the profit state accumulation is not canceled.

  The symbol form determination unit 320B includes an accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 having a cancellation symbol lottery unit 344, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 322, an accumulation cancellation control unit 323, and the like. As shown in FIG. 102, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes one of a one-stage lottery unit 340 and a two-stage lottery unit 350 (see FIG. 116).

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes the one-stage lottery unit 340 that performs the one-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition. Therefore, the one-stage lottery unit 340 sets the accumulation cancellation condition by the one-stage lottery. And playability is enhanced. Further, since the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 has a two-stage lottery means 350 for performing a two-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, the two-stage lottery means 350 can set the accumulation cancellation condition by a two-stage lottery. Yes, and playability increases.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the one-stage lottery means 340 has a release symbol lottery means 344. Therefore, when the one-stage lottery means 340 is used, the release symbol lottery means 344 is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the power is turned on and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, Any of the jackpot symbol forms “1, 1, 1”, “3, 3, 3”,... According to the lottery value is alternatively activated. Similarly, when the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 322 determines to cancel the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control unit 323 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state.

  By the way, the table jackpot symbol form shown in FIG. 113 may be a past jackpot symbol such as the previous time or the previous time. Further, in this way, the one-stage lottery means 340 includes the cancellation symbol lottery means 344 for determining the release symbol after change displayed by the special symbol display means 111 as the accumulation cancellation condition for canceling the accumulation of the profit state by lottery. Therefore, the cancellation symbol lottery means 344 can determine the accumulation cancellation condition based on the cancellation symbol by the lottery, and the gameability is improved.

  On the other hand, when the two-stage lottery means 350 is used, as shown in FIG. 116, the lottery table selection means 351 included in the two-stage lottery means 350 includes a high-probability table with a high lottery probability for cancellation and a lottery for cancellation. One of the low probability tables with low probability is included. For example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs and the high probability table shown in FIG. 120 is used, first, by the first stage lottery, a plurality of symbol pattern groups “1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2” are used. , 3,3,3 "," 2,2,2,3,3,3,4,4,4 "," 3,3,3,4,4,4,5,5,5 ", ... Any one of the symbol pattern groups is selected according to the accumulation cancellation probability.

  In the subsequent second stage lottery, one symbol aspect of the selected symbol aspect group is specified. That is, the accumulation of the profit state is canceled only when the current stop symbol pattern matches any jackpot symbol pattern of the set symbol pattern group. Similarly, when a low probability table (not shown) is used, one jackpot symbol pattern is identified by the first stage lottery and the second stage lottery. When any one of the jackpot symbol patterns matches, the accumulation of the profit state is canceled.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation determining unit 133 determines whether or not the changed special stop symbol displayed by the special symbol display unit 111 is a stop symbol mode for canceling the accumulation of the profit state. Therefore, whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state can be determined by determining the stop symbol mode condition by the symbol mode determining means 320.

  Furthermore, in this way, the two-stage lottery means 350 selects the lottery table used when performing the first lottery and the second lottery from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities set in advance. Since the means 351 is provided, the lottery table selecting means 351 can select a lottery table to be drawn in two stages from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities, and the gameability is improved.

Fluctuation frequency determination means 330
As shown in FIG. 108, the variation number determination unit 330 is configured by either the variation number determination unit 330A or the variation number determination unit 330B.
The variation count determination unit 330A includes a cancellation variation count storage unit 331, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 332, an accumulation cancellation control unit 333, and the like.

  The release variation number storage means 331 is composed of a variation number storage memory or the like in the RAM 45c, and stores the variation number preset by the manufacturer. For example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the number of fluctuations for accumulation cancellation after power-on is tabulated into a plurality of fluctuation number groups such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The change frequency group can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or can be selectively activated by appropriately changing any one on the hall side. .

  When the game is started by the player and the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the accumulation cancellation determination control means 332 periodically It is determined whether or not the current number of fluctuations by the number-of-changes counting unit 72 matches any of the number of fluctuations in the set number of fluctuations group. May be canceled. However, if the number of fluctuations by the fluctuation number counting means 72 does not match any of the fluctuation numbers for accumulation in the activated fluctuation number group, the profit state accumulation is not canceled.

  The variation number determination unit 330B includes an accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 having a cancellation variation number lottery unit 345, an accumulation cancellation determination control unit 332, an accumulation cancellation control unit 333, and the like. As shown in FIG. 102, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes one of a one-stage lottery unit 340 and a two-stage lottery unit 350 (see FIG. 116).

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation condition setting unit 134 includes the one-stage lottery unit 340 that performs the one-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition. Therefore, the one-stage lottery unit 340 sets the accumulation cancellation condition by the one-stage lottery. And playability is enhanced. Further, since the accumulation cancellation condition setting means 134 has a two-stage lottery means 350 for performing a two-stage lottery for setting the accumulation cancellation condition, the two-stage lottery means 350 can set the accumulation cancellation condition by a two-stage lottery. Yes, and playability increases.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the one-stage lottery means 340 has a release variation frequency lottery means 345. Therefore, when the one-stage lottery means 340 is used, the release variation frequency lottery means 345 is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), when the power is turned on and when winning by lottery by the lottery means 85, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, Any one of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... According to the lottery value may be validated alternatively. Here, the number of changes shown in FIG. 114 may be the number of changes from the end of each jackpot, or may be the number of changes from the end of jackpot that is equal to or greater than the set number.

  Similarly, when the accumulation cancellation determination control unit 332 determines to cancel the accumulation, the accumulation cancellation control unit 333 may cancel the accumulation of the profit state. Incidentally, the tabulated number of accumulation fluctuations shown in FIG. 114 may be the number of fluctuations since the end of the previous jackpot.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the one-stage lottery means 340 determines the number of cancellation fluctuations as a storage cancellation condition for canceling the accumulation of the profit state by lottery. Since the lottery means 345 is provided, the cancellation change frequency lottery means 345 can determine the accumulation release condition based on the number of release fluctuations due to the lottery, and the gameability is improved.

  On the other hand, when the two-stage lottery means 350 is used, as shown in FIG. 116, the lottery table selection means 351 included in the two-stage lottery means 350 includes a high-probability table with a high lottery probability for cancellation and a lottery for cancellation. One of the low probability tables with low probability is included. For example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs, when the high probability table shown in FIG. 121 is used, first, a plurality of variable frequency groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”, Any one of the change frequency groups is selected according to the accumulation cancellation probability.

  In the subsequent second-stage lottery, one variation number in the selected variation number group is specified. That is, when the specified number of fluctuations is determined as the number of ceiling fluctuations, and the number of fluctuations of the fluctuation number counting means 72 reaches the number of ceiling fluctuations, the accumulation of profit status is cancelled. Similarly, when a low probability table (not shown) is used, one release variation number is specified by the first step lottery and the second step lottery, and the variation number counting unit 72 performs the variation number. When the ceiling reaches the number of ceiling fluctuations, the accumulation of profit status is canceled.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the accumulation cancellation determining means 133 is the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 is the variation number for canceling the accumulation of the profit state. Since the variation number determination unit 330 that determines whether or not there is a profit state, whether or not to cancel the accumulation of the profit state can be determined by determining the variation number condition of the special symbol by the variation number determination unit 330.

  Furthermore, in this way, the two-stage lottery means 350 selects the lottery table used when performing the first lottery and the second lottery from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities set in advance. Since the means 351 is provided, the lottery table selecting means 351 can select a lottery table to be drawn in two stages from a plurality of lottery tables having different lottery probabilities, and the gameability is improved.

Next, the cancellation content changing means 135 for changing the cancellation status of the profit status to be canceled when releasing the storage of the profit status will be described.
As shown in FIG. 102, the release content changing unit 135 includes one of a big hit priority release unit 360, a small hit priority release unit 370, a release number determination unit 380, and a release type determination unit 390. is there.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation unit 67 includes the cancellation content changing unit 135 that changes the cancellation content of the profit state to be canceled, so that the cancellation content changing unit can change the cancellation content of the profit state to be canceled. Yes, and playability increases.

Jackpot priority release means 360
The jackpot priority canceling means 360 releases the jackpot state preferentially when canceling the accumulated profit state. As shown in FIG. 122, the jackpot flag searching means 361, the jackpot flag head side moving means 362, , Storage cancellation control means 363 and the like.

  The jackpot flag search means 361 sequentially searches for the jackpot flag from the top side among a plurality of types of profit status flags stored in the profit status storage memory of the profit status storage means 66 when releasing the profit status. For example, as shown in FIG. 21, from the head of the accumulation order No. 1 in the profit state accumulation memory, “open extension flag”, “small hit flag”, “special symbol short time flag”, “probability variation flag”, “big hit” It searches sequentially that "flag" is accumulated.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 126, the big hit flag head side moving means 362 uses the big hit flag (see FIG. 21) of the accumulation order 5 searched by the big hit flag search means 361 as the head side of the profit state storage memory. That is, it is moved to the first accumulation order. Thereafter, the accumulation cancellation control means 363 preferentially cancels the accumulation of the big hit flag moved to the head side. However, if the jackpot flag cannot be searched by the jackpot flag search means 361, that is, if the jackpot flag is not stored in the profit status storage memory, the accumulation is canceled from the profit status flag of the first accumulation order. Good. Or you may make it wait until a jackpot flag is accumulate | stored.

  Thus, the profit state generating means 76 has the jackpot generating means 77a for generating a jackpot state that opens and closes the jackpot means 25 in accordance with a predetermined rule, and the release content changing means 135 is the accumulated jackpot. Since the jackpot priority canceling means 360 for preferentially releasing the state is provided, the jackpot priority canceling means 360 releases the stored jackpot state preferentially, so that a sense of expectation and a game are enhanced.

Small hit priority release means 370
The small hit priority canceling means 370 releases the small hit state preferentially when canceling the accumulated profit state. As shown in FIG. 123, the small hit priority searching means 371 and the small hitting flag head side A moving unit 372, an accumulation cancellation control unit 373, and the like are included.

  The small hit flag search means 371 sequentially searches for a small hit flag from the top side among a plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory of the profit state storage means 66 when releasing the profit state. For example, as shown in FIG. 21, from the head of the accumulation order No. 1 in the profit state accumulation memory, “open extension flag”, “small hit flag”, “special symbol short time flag”, “probability variation flag”, “big hit” It searches sequentially that "flag" is accumulated.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, the small hit flag leading side moving means 372 uses the small hit flag of the accumulation order searched by the small hit flag searching means 371, that is, the leading side of the profit state accumulation memory, that is, Move to the first accumulation order. Thereafter, the accumulation cancellation control means 373 releases the accumulation of the small hit flag moved to the head side with priority. However, if the small hit flag cannot be searched by the small hit flag search means 371, that is, if the small hit flag is not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, the accumulation is canceled from the profit state flag of the first accumulation order. It may be. Or you may make it wait until a small hit flag is accumulate | stored.

  In this way, the profit state generating means 76 opens and closes the big prize opening means 25 in accordance with a predetermined rule a smaller number of times than the big win state so that the degree of the profit state becomes smaller than the big win state. And the release content changing means 135 has a small hit priority release means 370 that releases the accumulated small hit state preferentially. Since it is released preferentially from the accumulated small hit state, expectation and playability are enhanced.

  The cancellation number determination means 380 determines the number of profit states to cancel accumulation, and includes a cancellation number lottery means 381, accumulation cancellation control means 382, etc., as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 128, the number-of-release lottery means 381 determines the number of releases to cancel the accumulation by lottery based on a predetermined lottery probability. The accumulation cancellation control unit 382 cancels the profit state flags corresponding to the number of cancellations determined from the head side of the profit state storage memory based on the number of cancellations determined in this way.

  In this case, in combination with either the big hit priority release means 360 or the small hit priority release means 370, among the profit status flags of the determined number of release, the big hit flag is canceled first, or the small hit priority flag is first set May be canceled.

  As described above, the cancellation content changing unit 135 includes the cancellation number determination unit 380 that determines the number of profit states to be released from the accumulation, and therefore the number of profit states to be released from the accumulation is determined by the cancellation number determination unit 380. , Expectation and playability will increase.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125, the release type determining means 390 is configured by any one of nine types of release type determining means 390A to 390I.
Release type determining means 390A
The release type determination unit 390A includes a jackpot flag / probability variation flag search unit 391, an accumulation release control unit 400, and the like. The jackpot flag / probability variation flag search means 391 sequentially retrieves a jackpot flag and a probability variation flag from the head side from among a plurality of types of profit status flags stored in the profit status storage memory when releasing the profit status. To do.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 cancels the accumulation of the jackpot flag and the probability variation flag retrieved by the jackpot flag / probability variation flag retrieval unit 391 simultaneously (or continuously). However, if the jackpot flag or the probability variation flag cannot be searched, that is, if the jackpot flag and the probability variation flag are not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, it waits until these flags are accumulated together. May be.

Release type determining means 390B
The release type determination unit 390B includes a jackpot flag / release extension flag search unit 392, an accumulation release control unit 400, and the like. The jackpot flag / release extension flag search means 392 sequentially searches the jackpot flag and the release extension flag from the top of the plurality of types of profit status flags stored in the profit status storage memory when releasing the profit status. To do.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) releases the accumulation of the big hit flag and the release extension flag searched by the big hit flag / release extension flag search unit 392. However, if the jackpot flag or the release extension flag cannot be searched, that is, if the jackpot flag and the release extension flag are not stored in the profit state storage memory, the system waits until these flags are stored together. It may be.

Release type determining means 390C
The release type determination means 390C includes a jackpot flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 393, an accumulation release control means 400, and the like. The jackpot flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 393, when canceling the profit status, selects the jackpot flag and the special symbol time / short flag from the top of the plurality of types of profit status flags stored in the profit status storage memory. Search sequentially. Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the jackpot flag and the special symbol time / short flag searched by the jackpot flag / special symbol time / short flag search unit 393.

  However, if the jackpot flag or special symbol time flag cannot be searched, that is, if the jackpot flag and special symbol time flag are not accumulated in the profit status accumulation memory, the system waits until these flags are accumulated together. You may make it do. Here, the jackpot flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 393 is a jackpot flag / normal symbol time / short flag search means, and may search and cancel the jackpot flag and the normal symbol time / short flag.

Release type determining means 390D
The release type determination unit 390D includes a small hit flag / probability variation flag search unit 394, an accumulation release control unit 400, and the like. The small hit flag / probability variation flag searching means 394, when releasing the profit state, selects the small hit flag and the probability variation flag from the top of the plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory. Search sequentially.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 cancels the accumulation of the small hit flag and the probability variation flag searched by the small hit flag / probability variation flag retrieval unit 394 simultaneously (or continuously). However, if the small hit flag and the probability variation flag cannot be searched, that is, if the small hit flag and the probability variation flag are not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, it waits until these flags are accumulated together. You may make it do.

Release type determining means 390E
The release type determination unit 390E includes a small hit flag / release extension flag search unit 395, an accumulation release control unit 400, and the like. When the profit state is canceled, the small hit flag / open extension flag search means 395 selects the small hit flag and the open extension flag from the top of the plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory. Search sequentially.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the small hit flag and the release extension flag searched by the small hit flag / release extension flag search unit 395. However, if neither the small hit flag nor the open extension flag can be searched, that is, if the small hit flag and the open extension flag are not stored in the profit state storage memory, it waits until these flags are stored together. You may make it do.

Release type determining means 390F
The release type determination means 390F includes a small hit flag / special symbol time flag search means 396, an accumulation release control means 400, and the like. The small hit flag / special symbol short time flag search means 396 starts the small hit flag and the special symbol short time flag from among a plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory when releasing the profit state. Search sequentially from the side. Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the small hit flag and the special symbol short time flag searched by the small hit flag / special symbol short time flag search unit 396.

  However, if the small hit flag and the special symbol short time flag cannot be searched, that is, if the small hit flag and the special symbol short time flag are not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, these flags are accumulated together. You may make it wait until. Here, the small hit flag / special symbol short time flag search means 396 is a small hit flag / normal symbol short time flag search means, and may search and cancel the small hit flag and the normal symbol short time flag.

Release type determining means 390G
The release type determination means 390G includes a probability variation flag / special symbol time flag search means 397, an accumulation release control means 400, and the like. The probability variation flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 397 starts the probability variation flag and the special symbol time / short flag from among a plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state accumulation memory when releasing the profit state. Search sequentially from the side.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the probability variation flag and the special symbol time / short flag searched by the probability variation flag / special symbol time / short flag search unit 397. However, if the probability variation flag and special symbol time flag cannot be searched, that is, if the probability variation flag and special symbol time flag are not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, these flags are accumulated together. You may make it wait until. Here, the probability variation flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 397 is probability variation flag / normal symbol time / short flag search means, and may search and cancel the probability variation flag and the normal symbol time / short flag.

Release type determining means 390H
The release type determination unit 390H includes a probability variation flag / release extension flag search unit 398, an accumulation release control unit 400, and the like. The probability fluctuation flag / release extension flag search means 398, when canceling the profit state, sets the probability fluctuation flag and the release extension flag from the top of the plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory. Search sequentially.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the probability variation flag and the release extension flag searched by the probability variation flag / release extension flag search unit 398. However, if the probability variation flag or the release extension flag cannot be searched, that is, if the probability variation flag and the release extension flag are not accumulated in the profit state accumulation memory, the system waits until these flags are accumulated together. You may make it do.

Release type determining means 390I
This release type determination means 390I includes an open extension flag / special symbol time flag search means 399, an accumulation release control means 400, and the like. The release extension flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 399 starts the extension / extension flag and the special symbol time / short flag from among a plurality of types of profit state flags stored in the profit state storage memory when releasing the profit state. Search sequentially from the side.

  Therefore, the accumulation cancellation control unit 400 simultaneously (or continuously) cancels the accumulation of the release extension flag and the special symbol short time flag searched by the open extension flag / special symbol short time flag search unit 399. However, if the release extension flag or special symbol time flag cannot be searched, that is, if the release extension flag and special symbol time flag are not stored in the profit status storage memory, these flags are stored together. You may make it wait until. Here, the release extension flag / special symbol time / short flag search means 399 is an open / extension flag / normal symbol time / short flag search means, and the release extension flag and the normal symbol time / short flag may be searched and canceled.

As described above, since the cancellation content changing unit 135 includes the cancellation type determination unit 390 that determines the type of profit state to cancel accumulation, the cancellation type determination unit 390 determines the type of profit state to cancel accumulation. The player will be looking forward to which profit state will be released, and the expectation and gameability will be enhanced. Here, in addition to the release type determination means 390A to 390I, a special symbol short time flag / normal symbol short time flag search means is provided to cancel the accumulation of the special symbol short time flag and the normal symbol short time flag simultaneously (or continuously). You may do it.
Next, a profit state ending unit 68 for appropriately ending the profit state generated by the accumulation cancellation by the accumulation cancellation unit 67 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the profit state ending unit 68 includes a probability variation end condition setting unit 136 for setting a condition for ending the probability variation state generated by the accumulation cancellation, and a condition for ending the open extension state generated by the accumulation cancellation. An open / extend end condition setting means 137 for setting the time, a special symbol time / short end condition setting means 138 for setting a condition for ending the special symbol time / short state generated by canceling accumulation, and a normal symbol time / short state generated by canceling accumulation. It has any one of the normal symbol short-time end condition setting means 139 for setting conditions.

  As described above, since the profit state ending means 68 for ending the profit state generated by releasing the accumulation by the accumulation releasing means 67 is provided, the profit state released by the accumulation releasing means 67 is ended by the profit state ending means 67. Therefore, it is possible to reliably terminate the profit state generated after the cancellation.

First, the probability variation end condition setting unit 136 will be described.
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136 sets conditions for ending the probability variation state canceled by the accumulation canceling unit 67. As shown in FIG. 130, six types of probability variation end condition setting units 136A to 136F are set. It is comprised in any one of these.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136A
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136A includes an elapsed time determination unit 136a, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. Based on the elapsed time information received from the elapsed time measuring means 70, the elapsed time determining means 136a is generated by the probability fluctuation / opening extension means 78a or the probability fluctuation means 78b after the occurrence of the probability fluctuation state that has been released this time. For example, it is determined every minute time whether a predetermined time has passed, such as about 30 minutes.

  When the probability variation end command unit 136h receives the elapsed time completion information from the elapsed time determination unit 136a, the probability variation state is instructed to the probability variation / release extension unit 78a or the probability variation unit 78b. To end.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when about 30 minutes have elapsed since the occurrence of the probability-released probability fluctuation state. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136B
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136B includes a variation number determination unit 136b, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. Based on the fluctuation frequency information received from the fluctuation frequency counting means 72, the fluctuation frequency determination means 136b has received the probability fluctuation state that has been released from the accumulation by the probability fluctuation / release extension means 78a or the probability fluctuation means 78b. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, for example, about 100 times.

  When the probability variation end command unit 136h receives the variation completion information indicating that the predetermined variation number has been reached from the variation number determination unit 136b, the probability variation end release unit 78b sends a probability to the probability variation / open extension unit 78a or the probability variation unit 78b. Command to end the fluctuating state.

  As a result, after the probability variation state for which accumulation has been canceled has occurred, the process automatically ends when the special symbol has been varied for a predetermined number of times. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136C
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136C includes a jackpot occurrence determination unit 136c, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. The jackpot occurrence determination unit 136c determines, for example, every minute time whether or not the next jackpot state has been generated by an internal lottery after the probability variation state released from accumulation has occurred this time.

  Then, when the probability variation end command means 136h receives from the jackpot occurrence determination means 136c the jackpot winning information that has been won by the lottery means 85, the probability variation / opening extension means 78a or the probability variation means 78b. , Command to end the probability variation state.

  As a result, after the probability release state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when the next jackpot is won by lottery. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136D
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136D includes a stop symbol determination unit 136d, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. The stop symbol determination means 136d is, for example, an unusual stop symbol such as “2, 4, 6”, where the special symbol variation stop after the occurrence of the stochastic variation state released from the accumulation occurs. It is determined every minute time whether or not the numerical value of the first digit of the total numerical value of the three special symbols is a predetermined symbol mode such as “odd number” or “even number”.

  Then, when the probability variation end command unit 136h receives the variation stop information for stopping in a predetermined symbol form from the stop symbol determining unit 136d, the probability variation end instruction unit 136h gives a probability to the probability variation / release extension unit 78a or the probability variation unit 78b. Command to end the fluctuating state.

  Thereby, after the probability variation state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the special symbol automatically ends when the variation is stopped in a predetermined symbol form. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136E
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136E includes a firing ball number determination unit 136e, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. Based on the number of shot balls received from the number of shot balls counting means 71, the number of shot balls determining means 136e causes the probability fluctuation state that has been canceled this time by the probability fluctuation / release extension means 78a or the probability fluctuation means 78b. After that, it is determined every minute time whether or not the number of shot balls has reached a predetermined number, for example, 3000.

  Then, when the probability variation end command means 136h receives the firing completion information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been fired from the firing ball number judging means 136e, the probability variation / release extension means 78a or the probability fluctuation means 78b. , Command to end the probability variation state.

  As a result, after a probability variation state in which accumulation has been canceled occurs, it automatically ends when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Probability variation end condition setting means 136F
The probability variation end condition setting unit 136F includes an accumulation number determination unit 136f, a probability variation end instruction unit 136h, and the like. Based on the accumulated number information received from the accumulated number counting means 69, the accumulated number determining means 136 f is generated by the probability fluctuation / release extension means 78 a or the probability fluctuation means 78 b after the occurrence of the probability fluctuation state that has been released this time. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of accumulation has increased by a predetermined number, for example, by one or two.

  The fluctuation time shortening end instruction unit 136h receives the probability completion / release extension unit 78a or the probability variation unit 78b when receiving the accumulation completion information from the accumulation number determination unit 136f in which the accumulation number has increased corresponding to the predetermined number. To end the probability variation state.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when the accumulated number increases by a predetermined number after the release-extended state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs. Here, in the profit state where the probability fluctuation state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by the internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

  As described above, the profit state generating means 76 includes the probability changing means 78a and 78b for generating a probability change state for changing the lottery probability for generating the profit state by the lottery means 85 with a high probability. Since the probability variation end condition setting means 136 for setting the condition for ending the probability variation state is provided, the end condition of the probability variation state is set by the probability variation end condition setting means 136. The state can be reliably ended with any of the set end conditions.

Next, the open / extend end condition setting means 137 will be described.
The open extension end condition setting means 137 sets conditions for ending the open extension state released by the accumulation release means 67, and as shown in FIG. 131, six types of open extension end condition setting means 137A to 137F. It is comprised in any one of these.

Opening extension end condition setting means 137A
The open extension end condition setting unit 137A includes an elapsed time determination unit 137a, an open extension end command unit 137h, and the like. Based on the elapsed time information received from the elapsed time timing means 70, the elapsed time determination means 137a is generated by the probability variation / release extension means 78a or the probability variation means 78b from the occurrence of the release extension state that has been released this time. For example, it is determined every minute time whether a predetermined time has passed, such as about 30 minutes.

  Then, when the open extension end command means 137h receives the elapsed time completion information from the elapsed time determination means 137a, the open extension state is given to the probability variation / open extension means 78a or the open extension means 78c. To end.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when about 30 minutes have passed since the release of the extended release state. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Open extension end condition setting means 137B
The open extension end condition setting unit 137B includes a fluctuation number determination unit 137b, an open extension end command unit 137h, and the like. Based on the fluctuation count information received from the fluctuation count counting means 72, the fluctuation count determination means 137b has been operated by the probability fluctuation / release extension means 78a or the release extension means 78c after the release / release extension state that has been released this time. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, for example, about 100 times.

  When the opening extension end command means 137h receives the change completion information indicating that the predetermined number of changes has been reached from the change count determination means 137b, the release extension end instruction means 137h releases the probability change / open extension means 78a or the release extension means 78c. Command to end extended state.

  As a result, after the accumulated extended release state occurs, the process automatically ends when the special symbol changes over a predetermined number of times. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Open extension end condition setting means 137C
The open extension end condition setting means 137C includes a jackpot occurrence determination means 137c, an open extension end instruction means 137h, and the like. The jackpot occurrence determination means 137c determines, for example, every minute time whether or not the next jackpot state has been generated by an internal lottery after the release of the released extended state has occurred this time.

  The release extension end command means 137h, when receiving the jackpot winning information that has been won by the lottery by the lottery means 85 from the jackpot occurrence determination means 137c, the probability variation / open extension means 78a or the opening extension means 78c. , Command to end the open extension state.

  As a result, after the release extended state where the accumulation has been canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when the next jackpot is won by lottery. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Open extension end condition setting means 137D
The opening extension end condition setting unit 137D includes a stop symbol determination unit 137d, an opening extension end command unit 137h, and the like. The stop symbol determination means 137d is a special stop symbol such as “2, 4, 6”, for example, after the occurrence of the open extended state where the accumulation has been canceled. It is determined every minute time whether or not the numerical value of the first digit of the total numerical value of the three special symbols is a predetermined symbol mode such as “odd number” or “even number”.

  Then, the release extension end command means 137h opens the probability change / release extension means 78a or the release extension means 78c when receiving the change stop information for stopping in a predetermined pattern form from the stop symbol determination means 137d. Command to end extended state.

  As a result, the special symbol is automatically ended when the special symbol has been variably stopped in a predetermined symbol form after the release-released extended state has occurred. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Opening extension end condition setting means 137E
The open extension end condition setting unit 137E includes a firing ball number determination unit 137e, an open extension end command unit 137h, and the like. Based on the shot ball number information received from the shot ball number counting unit 71, the shot ball number determining unit 137e generates an open extension state that has been released from the accumulation by the probability variation / release extension unit 78a or the release extension unit 78c. After that, it is determined every minute time whether or not the number of shot balls has reached a predetermined number, for example, 3000.

  Then, when the release extension end command means 137h receives the firing completion information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been fired from the shot ball number judgment means 137e, the probability extension / release extension means 78a or the release extension means 78c. , Command to end the open extended state.

  As a result, after the release extended state in which the accumulation has been canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Open extension end condition setting means 137F
The open extension end condition setting unit 137F includes an accumulation number determination unit 137f, an open extension end command unit 137h, and the like. Based on the accumulated number information received from the accumulated number counting means 69, the accumulated number determining means 137f has been released by the probability variation / open extension means 78a or the open extension means 78c after the release extension state is released. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of accumulation has increased by a predetermined number, for example, by one or two.

  The fluctuation time shortening end instruction means 137h receives the probability completion / release extension means 78a or the release extension means 78c when receiving the accumulation completion information from the accumulation number determination means 137f, where the accumulation number has increased corresponding to the predetermined number. To end the open extension state.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when the accumulated number increases by a predetermined number after the release-extended state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs. Here, in the profit state in which the open extended state is generated, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

  In this way, the normal symbol starting means 23 and the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol in such a manner that the normal symbol is changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball on the normal symbol starting means 23 are provided. The starter 24 is configured to be openable and closable, and the special symbol starter 24 is configured to open and close when the changed normal stop symbol displayed on the normal symbol display unit 112 is in the second specific symbol form. The profit state generating means 76 has open extension means 78a and 78c for setting conditions for generating an open extension state that extends the opening time from when the special symbol starting means 24 is opened until it is closed. Since the state ending means 68 has the open extension end condition setting means 137 for ending the open extension state, the open extension end condition setting means 137 sets the open / extended state. Since completion condition is set, the open extended state generated by accumulated released, can be reliably terminated at either end conditions that are set.

Next, the special symbol short time termination condition setting means 138 will be described.
The special symbol short-time end condition setting unit 138 sets conditions for terminating the special symbol short-time state released by the accumulation canceling unit 67. As shown in FIG. 132, six types of special symbol short-time end condition setting unit It is comprised by any one of 138A-138F.

Special symbol short time termination condition setting means 138A
The special symbol short time end condition setting unit 138A includes an elapsed time determination unit 138a, a variable time shortening end command unit 138h, and the like. Based on the elapsed time information received from the elapsed time measuring means 70, the elapsed time determination means 138a has received, for example, about 30 times after the special symbol time reduction state that has been released from the accumulation by the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a. Whether or not a predetermined time such as minutes has passed is determined every minute time.

  Then, the variable time shortening end command unit 138h causes the special symbol variable time shortening unit 79a to end the special symbol time shortening state when receiving the elapsed time completion information due to the elapse of a predetermined time from the elapsed time determining unit 138a. To command.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when about 30 minutes have elapsed since the occurrence of the special symbol short-time state for which accumulation has been canceled. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Special symbol short time termination condition setting means 138B
The special symbol time end condition setting unit 138B includes a variation number determination unit 138b, a variation time shortening end command unit 138h, and the like. Based on the fluctuation number information received from the fluctuation number counting means 72, the fluctuation number determination means 138b has a predetermined number of fluctuations after the special symbol short-time state that has been released this time by the special symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79a. It is determined every minute time whether the number of times, for example, about 100 times has been reached.

  When the fluctuation time shortening end command means 138h receives the fluctuation completion information indicating that the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached from the fluctuation number judgment means 138b, the special time fluctuation state shortening means 79a is informed of the special symbol time shortening state. Command to end. As a result, after the special symbol time-short state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when the special symbol fluctuates over a predetermined number of times. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Special symbol short end condition setting means 138C
The special symbol short time end condition setting unit 138C includes a jackpot occurrence determination unit 138c, a variable time shortening end command unit 138h, and the like. The jackpot occurrence determination means 138c determines, for example, every minute time whether or not the next jackpot state has occurred due to an internal lottery after the special symbol time-short state whose accumulation has been canceled this time has occurred.

  Then, the variable time shortening end command means 138h receives the special symbol time reduction means 79a from the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a when receiving the jackpot winning information that is won by the lottery means 85 from the jackpot occurrence determining means 138c. Command to end state.

  As a result, after the special symbol short-time state that has been canceled is generated, the process automatically ends when the next jackpot is won by lottery. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Special symbol short time termination condition setting means 138D
The special symbol short time termination condition setting unit 138D includes a stop symbol determination unit 138d, a variable time shortening termination command unit 138h, and the like. The stop symbol determination means 138d is a rare stop symbol such as “2, 4, 6”, for example, “2, 4, 6”, etc. It is determined every minute time whether or not the numerical value of the first place of the total number of the three special symbols is a predetermined symbol mode such as “odd number” or “even number”.

  When the variable time shortening end command means 138h receives from the stop symbol determining means 138d variable stop information for stopping in a predetermined symbol form, the special time change time shortening means 79a is informed of the special symbol short time state. Command to end.

  As a result, after the special symbol time-short state in which the accumulation has been canceled occurs, the special symbol is automatically ended when the special symbol is variably stopped in a predetermined symbol form. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Special symbol short time termination condition setting means 138E
The special symbol short time end condition setting means 138E has a firing ball number determination means 138e, a variable time shortening end instruction means 138h, and the like. Based on the number of shot balls received from the number of shot balls counting means 71, the number of shot balls determining means 138e is fired after the special symbol short-time state that has been released this time is generated by the special symbol change time shortening means 79a. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of balls has reached a predetermined number, for example, 3000.

  The variation time shortening termination command means 138h receives the special symbol time shortening with respect to the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a when receiving the completion information of the firing of a predetermined number of game balls from the firing ball number determination means 138e. Command to end state.

  As a result, after a special symbol time-short state in which accumulation has been canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Special symbol short end condition setting means 138F
The special symbol short time end condition setting means 138F has a cumulative number determination means 138f, a variable time shortening end command means 138h, and the like. Based on the accumulated number information received from the accumulated number counting means 69, the accumulated number determining means 138f has a predetermined number of accumulated times after the special symbol time shortening state that has been released by the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a has occurred this time. An increase corresponding to the number, for example, whether it has increased by one or two, is determined every minute time.

  Then, the fluctuation time shortening end command means 138h receives the special symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79a from the special symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79a when it receives the accumulation completion information from the accumulation number determination means 138f. Command to end symbol short state.

  Thereby, after the special symbol time-short state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when the accumulation number increases by a predetermined number. Here, in the profit state in which this special symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big win state or a small hit state is generated by internal lottery, it is determined to be stored by the profit state storage means 66 As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

  As described above, the profit state generating means 76 has the special symbol variation time shortening means 79a for generating the special symbol short time state for shortening the variation time of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display means 11 as compared with the normal state. Since the state ending means 68 has the special symbol short time end condition setting means 138 for setting a condition for ending the special symbol short time state, the special symbol short time end condition setting means 138 sets the special symbol short time end condition end condition. Therefore, it is possible to reliably end the special symbol short-time state generated by canceling the accumulation under any of the set end conditions.

Next, the normal symbol short time end condition setting means 139 will be described.
The normal symbol short-time end condition setting means 139 sets conditions for ending the normal symbol short-time state released by the accumulation canceling means 67. As shown in FIG. 133, six types of normal symbol short-time end condition setting means It is comprised by any one of 139A-139F.

Normal symbol short time end condition setting means 139A
The normal symbol time end condition setting unit 139A includes an elapsed time determination unit 139a, a variable time reduction end instruction unit 139h, and the like. Based on the elapsed time information received from the elapsed time measuring means 70, the elapsed time determination means 139a has, for example, about 30 times since the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b generates the normal symbol time-short state that has been released this time. Whether or not a predetermined time such as minutes has passed is determined every minute time.

  Then, the fluctuation time shortening end command means 139h causes the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b to end the normal symbol time shortening state when it receives the elapsed time completion information from the elapsed time determination means 139a. To command.

  As a result, the process automatically ends when about 30 minutes have elapsed since the occurrence of the normal symbol short-time state for which accumulation has been canceled. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Normal symbol short end condition setting means 139B
The normal symbol time end condition setting unit 139B includes a variation number determination unit 139b, a variation time shortening end command unit 139h, and the like. Based on the fluctuation number information received from the fluctuation number counting means 72, the fluctuation number determination means 139b has a predetermined number of fluctuations since the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening state 79b that has been released this time is generated by the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b. It is determined every minute time whether the number of times, for example, about 100 times has been reached.

  When the fluctuation time shortening end instruction means 139h receives the change completion information indicating that the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached from the fluctuation number determination means 139b, the fluctuation time shortening end instruction means 139h sets the normal symbol time shortening state to the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b. Command to end.

  As a result, after the normal symbol time-short state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the normal symbol is automatically ended when the symbol changes over a predetermined number of times. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Normal symbol short time termination condition setting means 139C
The normal symbol time end condition setting means 139C includes a jackpot occurrence determination means 139c, a variable time shortening end instruction means 139h, and the like. The jackpot occurrence determination means 139c determines, for example, every minute time whether or not the next jackpot state has been generated by internal lottery after the occurrence of the normal symbol short-time state whose accumulation has been canceled this time.

  The variation time shortening termination command means 139h receives the jackpot winning information that has been won by the lottery by the lottery means 85 from the jackpot occurrence determination means 139c, the normal symbol time shortening to the normal symbol variation time shortening means 79b. Command to end state.

  Thereby, after the normal symbol short-time state in which the accumulation is canceled occurs, the process automatically ends when the next jackpot is won by lottery. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Normal symbol short end condition setting means 139D
The normal symbol short time end condition setting unit 139D includes a stop symbol determining unit 139d, a variable time shortening end command unit 139h, and the like. The stop symbol determining means 139d is a rare stop symbol such as “2, 4, 6”, for example, when the symbol stop state of the normal symbol that has been released is generated. It is determined every minute time whether or not the numerical value of the first place of the total number of the three special symbols is a predetermined symbol mode such as “odd number” or “even number”.

  When the fluctuation time shortening termination command means 139h receives the fluctuation stop information for stopping in a predetermined symbol form from the stop symbol determination means 139d, the fluctuation time shortening end instruction means 139h sets the normal symbol short time state to the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b. Command to end.

  As a result, after the normal symbol short-time state in which the accumulation has been canceled occurs, the special symbol is automatically terminated when the special symbol is variably stopped in a predetermined symbol form. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Normal symbol short end condition setting means 139E
The normal symbol time end condition setting unit 139E includes a firing ball number determination unit 139e, a variable time shortening end command unit 139h, and the like. Based on the number of shot balls received from the number of shot balls counting means 71, the number of shot balls determining means 139e is fired after the normal symbol short-time state, which has been released this time, is generated by the normal symbol variation time shortening means 79b. It is determined every minute time whether or not the number of balls has reached a predetermined number, for example, 3000.

  Then, the fluctuation time shortening end command means 139h receives the information on the completion of firing that a predetermined number of game balls have been fired from the firing ball number determination means 139e, the normal symbol time shortening to the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b. Command to end state.

  As a result, after a normal symbol short-time state in which accumulation has been canceled has occurred, the game automatically ends when a predetermined number of game balls have been launched. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

Normal symbol short end condition setting means 139F
The normal symbol short-time end condition setting unit 139F includes an accumulated number determination unit 139f, a variable time shortening end command unit 139h, and the like. Based on the accumulated number information received from the accumulated number counting means 69, the accumulated number determining means 139f has a predetermined accumulated number after the normal symbol variation time shortening means 79b has caused the normal symbol short-time state to be released this time. An increase corresponding to the number, for example, whether it has increased by one or two, is determined every minute time.

  Then, the fluctuation time shortening end command means 139h receives the normal information fluctuation time shortening means 79b from the normal number fluctuation time shortening means 79b when it receives the accumulation completion information from the accumulation number determination means 139f. Command to end symbol short state.

  As a result, after the accumulated symbol cancellation state is generated, the process automatically ends when the accumulated number increases by a predetermined number. Here, in the profit state in which the normal symbol short-time state has occurred, when a profit state such as a big hit state or a small hit state is generated by an internal lottery, it is determined that the profit state storage means 66 stores the profit state. As described above, the profit state does not immediately occur and is stored in the profit state storage memory.

  In this way, the normal symbol starting means 23 and the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball on the normal symbol starting means 23 are provided. The special symbol starting means 24 is configured to open and close when the changed normal stop symbol displayed on the display means 112 is in a specific symbol form, and the profit state generating means 76 is displayed on the normal symbol displaying means 112. The normal symbol fluctuation time shortening means 79b for generating a normal symbol short-time state for reducing the normal symbol fluctuation time to be shorter than normal is provided, and the profit state ending means 68 normally sets a condition for ending the normal symbol short-time state. Since it has the symbol short time end condition setting means 139, the normal symbol short time end condition setting means 139 sets the normal symbol short time end condition, so that The normal symbol time reduction state generated by dividing, it is possible to reliably terminated by either termination conditions set.

  Next, the production control means 106 for producing an effect on the display means 110 when the profit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66 or when the accumulation state cancellation means 67 cancels the accumulation. In this way, the liquid crystal display (production means) 21 and the production control means 106 for executing at least one of the production related to the accumulation by the profit state accumulation means 66 and the production related to the accumulation cancellation by the accumulation cancellation means 67 are provided on the liquid crystal display 21. Therefore, the effect relating to the accumulation of the profit state can be executed via the display unit 110, or the effect relating to the release of the accumulation of the profit state can be executed via the display unit 110.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the effect control means 106 is an accumulation-time effect control means 410 that performs effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation means 66, and the profit accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66. Accumulated presence / absence effect control means 430 for effect control relating to presence / absence of state, accumulation type effect control means 450 for effect effect control relating to the type of profit state accumulated by profit state accumulation means 66, and profit state accumulation means 66. Any one of cancellation number effect control means 470 for performing effect control related to the number of profit states and accumulation cancellation effect control means 490 for effect control regarding accumulation cancellation by the accumulation cancellation means 67, or a combination of these. It is what you have.

  In this way, the production control means 106 includes the production time production control means 410 that performs production control relating to the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation means 66. Since the game is accumulated through the display means 110, the player's expectation can be increased.

  As described above, the production control means 106 includes the accumulation presence / absence production control means 430 that performs the production control relating to the presence / absence of the profit state accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, so that the accumulation presence / absence production control means 430 has accumulated. Any effect relating to the presence or absence of the profit state can be performed via the display means 110, and the player's expectation can be increased.

  In this way, the production control means 106 has the accumulation type production control means 450 that performs the production control relating to the type of profit state accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, so that the accumulation type production control means 450 stores the production type production control means 450. Any effect related to the type of profit state can be performed via the display means 110, and the player's expectation can be increased.

  As described above, the effect control means 106 includes the accumulated number effect control means 470 that performs effect control relating to the number of profit states accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, so that the accumulated number effect control means 470 stores the effect. Any effect relating to the number of profit states can be performed via the display means 110, and the player's expectation can be increased.

  As described above, the effect control means 106 includes the accumulation cancellation effect control means 490 that performs the effect control related to the accumulation cancellation by the accumulation cancellation means 66, so that any effect relating to the accumulation cancellation of the profit state is performed by the accumulation cancellation effect control means 490. This can be done via the display means 110, and the player's expectation can be increased.

Accumulation effect control means 410 (see FIGS. 135 to 143).
The accumulation-time production control unit 410 performs production control when the profit state is accumulated, and as shown in FIG. 135, the unconditional production control unit that unconditionally executes the production control related to the accumulation of the profit state. 411 and conditional effect control means 412 that conditionally executes effect control related to accumulation of profit status.

  As described above, when the storage-time production control unit 410 includes the unconditional production control unit 411 that unconditionally executes the production control related to the accumulation of the profit state, the unconditional production control unit 411 The production control when accumulating the profit state can be surely executed unconditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced. In addition, when the accumulation-time production control unit 410 includes conditional production control unit 412 that conditionally executes production control related to the accumulation of the profit state, the conditional production control unit 412 causes the profit state. It is possible to execute the performance control when accumulating the game conditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Next, the conditional effect control means 412 includes any one of the eight kinds of conditional effect control means 412A to 412H shown in FIGS. 136 to 143 (412A to 412H), which will be described in order. To do.

Conditional effect control means 412A
As shown in FIG. 136, the first conditional effect control means 412A has an effect lottery means 413 for lottering whether or not to perform effect control related to accumulation of profit status, an effect determination means 421, and a display. Control means 422 and the like are included. For example, as shown in FIG. 184, in the effect lottery means 413, there are a plurality of winning numerical values for effects such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When any profit state is stored by the profit state storage means 66, any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted by the effect lottery means 413, and the specified extracted value is stored in the winning numerical value table. Only when it matches one of the winning numerical values, the effect determining means 421 determines to produce an effect, so that the display control means 422 displays the effect display when the profit state is accumulated on the display means 110 (liquid crystal display 21). Done in

  For example, when accumulating the generated jackpot state, as shown in FIG. 192, the message “stock the jackpot!” Is displayed on the display means 110, or as shown in FIG. The appearance of the suction is displayed on the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches (20 times), the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the lottery value drawn in the accumulation of the profit state does not match any winning numerical value in the set winning numerical value group, the production in the current profit state accumulation is not performed.

  In this way, the conditional effect control means 412A has the effect lottery means 413 for drawing whether or not the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state is performed, so that the effect control is executed when the profit state is accumulated. Whether or not to do so can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the production lottery means 413, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 412B
Next, as shown in FIG. 137, the conditional effect control means 412B is the elapsed time for executing the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state, as the elapsed time counted by the elapsed time counting means 70. It includes an elapsed time determination unit 414 that determines whether or not, the display control unit 422 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the elapsed time determination means 414 includes a production elapsed time “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”... In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and any profit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, the current elapsed time by the elapsed time counting means 70 is validated. Only when the elapsed time group matches the elapsed time, the elapsed time determining means 414 determines to produce the effect, so that the display control means 422 displays the effect when the profit state is accumulated (FIG. 192). (See FIG. 193).

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any of the elapsed time groups that have been validated when accumulating the profit status, no presentation will be performed when accumulating the current profit status. . Here, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), at the time of accumulating the profit status, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, and any one of the lottery values corresponding to the lottery value is selected. The elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for presentation shown in FIG. 185 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this manner, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional effect control means 412B performs the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state for the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70. Since it has the elapsed time determination means 414 that determines whether or not it is the elapsed time to be executed, the elapsed time determination means 414 determines the elapsed time condition to determine whether or not the production control is executed when accumulating the profit state. It can be decided and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 412C
Next, as shown in FIG. 138, the conditional effect control means 412 </ b> C performs the effect control on the effect that the number of fired balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 is accumulated in the profit state. The number of shot balls determining means 415 for determining whether or not, the above-described display control means 422 and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of firing balls for production from the time of turning on the power is set to “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game by the player is started and the number of game balls fired by the player is increased and any profit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, the current number by the shot ball count means 71 is Only when the count value of the number of shot balls matches the number of shot balls in the set shot ball number group, it is determined by the shot ball number determining means 415 to produce effects. By 422, an effect display (see FIGS. 192 and 193) at the time of profit state accumulation is performed. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, when the profit state is accumulated, if the current number of fired balls does not match any of the number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that has been validated, an effect is produced for the accumulation of the current profit state. There is nothing. Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the profit state is accumulated, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn, and any one of the lottery values corresponding to the lottery value is selected. The fired ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,...

  By the way, the tabulated number of production launch balls shown in FIG. 186 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional effect control means 412C has the accumulated number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 in the accumulation of profit state. Since it has the firing ball number determination means 415 for determining whether or not the number of shot balls is to execute the effect control related to what is performed, it is determined whether or not the effect control is executed when accumulating the profit state. The means for determining the number of shot balls can be determined and determined by means 415, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 412D
Next, as shown in FIG. 139, the conditional effect control means 412 </ b> D is an effect related to the accumulation of the profit state for the first reserved ball count related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball count counting means 83. It has the 1st reservation ball number determination means 416 which determines whether it is the number of reservation balls which performs control, the display control means 422 etc. which were mentioned above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187, in the first reserved ball number determination means 416, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the first reserved ball number for the special symbol. Only when the player's game is started and any profit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, the first reserved ball number of the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is "4 or more". Since the first reserved ball number determining unit 416 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 422 performs an effect display when the profit state is accumulated (see FIGS. 192 and 193). The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, if the current number of first reserved balls is “less than 4” when accumulating the profit state, an effect upon accumulating the current profit state is not performed.

  As described above, the game includes a first holding ball number counting unit 83 that counts the number of the first reserved balls that are the game balls won in the special symbol starting unit 24 and hold the variable symbol display for the game balls. The attached effect control unit 412D determines whether or not the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting unit 83 is the number of reserved balls for performing the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state. Since the first reserved ball number determining means 416 determines whether or not the production control is executed when accumulating the profit state, the first reserved ball number determining means 416 determines the first reserved ball number condition. Can be determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 412E
Next, as shown in FIG. 140, the conditional effect control means 412E provides an effect relating to the accumulation of profit status in the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the second reserved ball number counting means 84. It has the 2nd reservation ball number determination means 417 which determines whether it is the number of reservation balls which performs control, the display control means 422 mentioned above, etc.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 188, in the second reserved ball number determination means 417, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the second reserved ball number for the normal symbol. Only when the player's game is started and any profit state is accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, the second reserved ball number of the second reserved ball number counting means 84 is "4 or more". Since the second reserved ball number determining unit 417 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 422 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 192 and 193) when the profit state is accumulated. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, if the current second reserved ball number is “less than 4” when accumulating the profit state, no effect is produced when accumulating the current profit state.

  As described above, the normal symbol starting means 23, the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23, and the normal symbol starting means. 23, a second holding ball number counting means 84 for counting the number of second holding balls that hold the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for the gaming ball, and the conditional effect control means 412E The second reserved ball number for determining whether or not the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the two reserved ball number counting means 84 is the reserved ball number for performing the production control relating to the accumulation of the profit state. Since it has the determination means 417, it can be determined by determining the second reserved ball number condition by the second reserved ball number determining means 417 to determine whether or not the production control is executed when accumulating the profit state. Interest It increases.

Conditional effect control means 412F
Next, as shown in FIG. 141, the conditional effect control unit 412F determines whether or not the number of changes counted by the change number counting unit 72 is the number of times of changing the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state. It includes a variation number determination means 418 for determining whether or not, the display control means 422 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the variation count determination means 418 has a plurality of variation counts for production since the power is turned on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  Each time the game is started by the player and the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the profit state accumulation means 66 causes any profit. When accumulating the state, the variation number determination unit 418 produces an effect only when the current variation number by the variation number counting unit 72 matches any variation number in the variation number group that is enabled. Therefore, the display control means 422 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 192 and 193) when the profit state is accumulated. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current number of fluctuations does not match any number of fluctuations in the activated fluctuation number group when accumulating the profit state, the production will not be performed when accumulating the current profit state. . Here, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the profit state is accumulated, an arbitrary one of “0 to 999” is internally drawn, and any change according to the lottery value is performed. The number group “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... May alternatively be validated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of variations for performance shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of variations since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Further, the tabulated number of performance changes shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of times of change since the end of the jackpot state generated by a specific symbol pattern set in advance. The specific design in this case may be set in advance by the manufacturer, or may be configured to be set according to the player's preference by the player during any game or special symbol changes. Good.

  Thus, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional effect control means 412F relates to the fact that the number of fluctuations counted by the variation number counting means 72 is accumulated in the profit state. Since there is a fluctuation number determination means 418 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations is to execute the production control, the fluctuation number judgment means 418 determines whether or not the production control is executed when accumulating the profit state. The number of times condition can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 412G
Next, as shown in FIG. 142, the conditional effect control means 412G provides an effect relating to the accumulation of profit status in the changed stop symbol (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display means 111. It has a symbol form determining means 419 for determining whether or not it is a symbol aspect for executing control, the display control means 422 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 419 includes “1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5” as the effect jackpot symbol pattern. , “7,7,7” and “9,9,9” are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, when the game by the player is started and the jackpot state is generated, the jackpot symbol mode is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75. Therefore, when any profit state is stored by the profit state storage unit 66, Only when the jackpot symbol pattern stored in the symbol pattern storage means 75 last time, two times before, or three or more times matches any of the effect jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. 190 (a) Since the determination unit 419 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 422 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 192 and 193) when the profit state is accumulated.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, when the profit status is accumulated, if the previous, previous or three or more previous jackpot designs do not match any of the presentation jackpot designs, the presentation of the current profit status will be performed. There is no. By the way, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when a plurality of types (for example, five types) effect jackpot symbol pattern groups are provided and profit states are accumulated, any one of “1 to 300” is stored. A numerical value may be lottery internally, and any jackpot symbol pattern mode group corresponding to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  In this way, the conditional effect control means 412G executes the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state for the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display means 111. Since it has the pattern mode determination means 419 for determining whether or not the profit state is accumulated, it is determined by determining the pattern mode conditions by the pattern mode determination means 419 whether or not the effect control is executed. Can increase the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 412H
Next, as shown in FIG. 143, in the conditional effect control unit 412H, is the accumulated number counted by the accumulated number counting unit 69 the accumulation number for performing the effect control related to the accumulation of the profit state? The storage number determination means 420 for determining whether or not, the display control means 422 described above, and the like are provided.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the accumulated number determination means 420, “total accumulated number ≧ 5” is set as the accumulated number for production on the manufacturer side. Therefore, since the game is started by the player and the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 is counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69, any profit state is determined by the profit state accumulation unit 66. In the case of accumulation, since the current total accumulated number is determined to be produced by the accumulated number determining unit 420 only when the set “total accumulated number ≧ 5”, the display control unit 422 An effect display (see FIGS. 192 and 193) at the time of profit state accumulation is performed.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  Here, the effect at the time of accumulating the profit state may be an effect display of the same content regardless of the type of profit state to be accumulated this time, or according to the type of profit state to be accumulated, the profit state The content to be displayed for each type may be different. However, when the current total number of accumulations is less than “5” when accumulating the profit state, there is no effect when accumulating the current profit state.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), in the accumulation number determination means 420, a dedicated accumulation number for determining whether or not an effect relating to the accumulation type is performed for each type of profit state is set as the effect accumulation number. You may make it do. In this case, for example, at the time of accumulating the big hit state every minute time or only when the number of accumulated big hit states is “2 or more”, the presentation of the content representing the accumulation of the big hit state is performed. Only when the number of accumulations is “3 or more”, an effect of content representing accumulation of the small hit state is performed.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional effect control unit 412H accumulates the profit state based on the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69. Since there is an accumulation number determination means 420 that determines whether or not the production control is to be performed, the accumulation number determination means 420 stores whether or not the production control is to be executed when accumulating the profit state. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Accumulation presence / absence production control means 430 (see FIGS. 144 to 152).
The accumulation presence / absence effect control means 430 performs effect control relating to the presence / absence of the profit state accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66. As shown in FIG. The unconditional effect control means 431 to be executed at the same time, and the conditional effect control means 432 to conditionally execute the effect control relating to whether or not the profit state is accumulated.

  As described above, when the accumulation presence / absence production control unit 430 includes the unconditional production control unit 431 that unconditionally executes the production control relating to the presence / absence of the profit state accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66, this unconditional. The effect control means 431 can reliably execute the effect control relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Further, when the accumulation presence / absence production control means 430 has conditional production control means 432 that conditionally executes the production control relating to the presence / absence of the profit state accumulated in the profit state accumulation means 66, this conditional production control. By means of means 432, it is possible to conditionally execute the production control relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, the conditional effect control means 432 includes any one of the eight kinds of conditional effect control means 432A to 432H shown in FIGS. 145 to 152 (432A to 432H), which will be described in order. To do.

Conditional effect control means 432A
As shown in FIG. 145, the first conditional effect control means 432A is an effect lottery means 433 for effecting lottery regarding whether or not the effect control relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state is executed, an effect determination means 441, and display control. Means 442 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 184, in the effect lottery means 433, there are a plurality of winning numerical values for effects such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the variation of the special symbol is started every minute time, the production lottery means 433 extracts any one numerical value from “0 to 299”, and the specified extracted value is stored in any winning numerical value table. Only when the winning value is met, the effect determining unit 441 determines to perform the effect, and therefore the display control unit 442 displays the effect on the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state on the display unit 110. .

  For example, when there is accumulation of any one of a plurality of types of profit status, as shown in FIG. 194, the message “Stock is present !!” is displayed on the display means 110, or there is no accumulation of profit status. Then, as shown in FIG. 195, the message “No stock !!” is displayed on the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, if the lottery value drawn at every minute time or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol does not match any winning value of the activated winning value group, the effect on the existence of the accumulated profit status Is never done.

  As described above, the conditional effect control means 432A has the effect lottery means 433 for lottering whether or not to execute the effect control related to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state, and therefore executes the effect control related to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state. Whether or not to do so can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the production lottery means 433, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 432B
Next, as shown in FIG. 146, the conditional effect control means 432B determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time counting means 70 is the elapsed time for performing the effect control related to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state. It includes an elapsed time determination means 434 for determining whether or not and the display control means 442 described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the elapsed time determining means 434 includes a production elapsed time “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,... In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is set to the set elapsed time. Since it is determined that the elapsed time determining means 434 produces an effect only when it matches any elapsed time of the group, the display control means 442 provides an effect display regarding the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state (FIG. 194). 195) is performed in the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time of the enabled elapsed time group at every minute time or at the start of the special symbol variation, there is an effect regarding whether or not profit status is accumulated. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,...

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for presentation shown in FIG. 185 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional effect control means 432B executes the effect control related to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state with the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70. Since the elapsed time determining means 434 for determining whether or not the elapsed time is to be performed, the elapsed time determining means 434 determines the elapsed time condition to determine whether or not the production control relating to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is to be executed. It can be decided and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 432C
Next, as shown in FIG. 147, the conditional effect control means 432C uses the number of fired balls for which the number of fired balls counted by the number of fired ball counting means 71 executes effect control regarding presence / absence of the accumulated profit state. It has a firing ball number determining means 435 for determining whether or not there is, the display control means 442 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of shot balls for production from the time of power activation is “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current shot ball by the shot ball number counting means 71 Only when the count value of the number matches the number of shot balls in the set number of shot balls group, it is determined by the shot ball number determining means 435 to produce effects. An effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) regarding the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state is performed on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current number of fired balls does not match any of the number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that has been activated at the minute time or at the start of special symbol fluctuation, There will be no directing. Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the firing ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of production launch balls shown in FIG. 186 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Thus, it is provided with the number-of-balls counting means 71 that counts the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional effect control means 432C is the profit state in which the number of balls shot by the number-of-balls counting means 71 is accumulated. Since it has the firing ball number determination means 435 for determining whether or not the number of shot balls is to execute the effect control relating to the presence / absence of the presence or absence, it is determined whether or not the effect control related to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is to be executed. The number of shot balls can be determined and determined by the means 435, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 432D
Next, as shown in FIG. 148, the conditional effect control means 432D provides the effect control regarding the presence / absence of the profit state in which the first reserved ball count related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball count counting means 83 is accumulated. The first holding ball number determination means 436 for determining whether or not the number of the holding balls is to be executed, the display control means 442 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187, in the first reserved ball number determination means 436, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the first reserved ball number for the special symbol. Only when the first reserved ball number of the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since the first reserved ball number determining unit 436 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 442 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) regarding the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current number of first reserved balls is “less than four” at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, no effect relating to the presence / absence of accumulation of profit state is performed.

  As described above, the game includes a first holding ball number counting unit 83 that counts the number of the first reserved balls that are the game balls won in the special symbol starting unit 24 and hold the variable symbol display for the game balls. The attached effect control means 432D determines whether or not the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is the reserved ball number for executing the effect control related to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state. Since it has the 1st reservation ball number determination means 436 to determine, the 1st reservation ball number determination means 436 determines the 1st reservation ball number condition, whether or not the presentation control relating to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is executed. Can be determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 432E
Next, as shown in FIG. 149, the conditional effect control means 432E provides the effect control regarding the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state in which the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the second reserved ball number counting means 84 is stored. The second reserved ball number determining means 437 for determining whether or not the number of reserved balls is to be executed, the display control means 442 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 188, in the second reserved ball number determining means 437, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the second reserved ball number for the normal symbol. Only when the number of second reserved balls in the second reserved ball number counting means 84 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since the second reserved ball number determining unit 437 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 442 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) on the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state on the display unit 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, if the current number of second reserved balls is “less than four” every minute time or at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, the effect relating to whether or not the profit state is accumulated is not performed.

  As described above, the normal symbol starting means 23, the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23, and the normal symbol starting means. 23, a second holding ball number counting means 84 for counting the number of second holding balls that hold the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for the gaming ball, and the conditional effect control means 432E The second reserved ball number determination for determining whether or not the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the two reserved ball number counting means 84 is the reserved ball number for executing the production control relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state. Since it has the means 437, it can be determined by determining the second reserved ball number condition by the second reserved ball number determining means 437 to determine whether or not the production control relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state is executed. Interest is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 432F
Next, as shown in FIG. 150, the conditional effect control unit 432F determines whether or not the number of changes counted by the change number counting unit 72 is the number of times of changing the effect control related to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state. The variation number determination means 438 for determining whether or not, the display control means 442 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the variation count determining means 438 has a plurality of variation counts for production since power-on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  Each time the game is started by the player and the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the fluctuation of the special symbol changes every minute time. At the start, the variation number determination unit 438 determines to produce an effect only when the current variation number by the variation number counting unit 72 matches any variation number in the set variation number group. Therefore, the display control unit 442 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) on the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state on the display unit 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current number of fluctuations does not match any number of fluctuations in the activated number of fluctuations group every minute time or at the start of special symbol fluctuations, there will be an effect regarding whether or not profit status is accumulated. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is randomly drawn at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of variations for performance shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of variations since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Further, the tabulated number of performance changes shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of times of change since the end of the jackpot state generated by a specific symbol pattern set in advance. The specific design in this case may be set in advance by the manufacturer, or may be configured to be set according to the player's preference by the player during any game or special symbol changes. Good.

  In this manner, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional effect control means 432F is an effect relating to the presence or absence of the profit state in which the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 is accumulated. Since the variation number determination means 438 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations for executing the control is included, the variation number determination means 438 determines whether or not the production control relating to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is to be performed. The number of times condition can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 432G
Next, as shown in FIG. 151, the conditional effect control means 432G provides the effect control regarding the presence / absence of the profit state in which the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display unit 111 is accumulated. It includes a symbol mode determination unit 439 that determines whether the symbol mode is a symbol mode for executing the above-described display control unit 442 or the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 439 includes “1,1,1”, “3,3,3”, “5,5,5” as the effect jackpot symbol patterns. , “7,7,7” and “9,9,9” are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, since the game by the player is started and the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state is generated is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the variation of the special symbol is started every minute time or Only when the last jackpot symbol mode stored in the mode storage unit 75, or the previous jackpot symbol mode three or more times before, matches any one of the effect jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. 190 (a). Since the display control unit 442 determines that the effect is to be produced by 439, the display unit 110 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) regarding the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, regarding the presence or absence of accumulation of profit status, if the jackpot symbol pattern at the previous time, two times before or after three or more times does not match any of the jackpot symbol patterns for production at the minute time or at the start of special symbol fluctuation There will be no directing. By the way, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a plurality of types (for example, five types) of effect jackpot symbol pattern groups are provided, and at the start of the variation of the special symbol every minute time, Arbitrary one numerical value may be lottery internally, and any jackpot symbol pattern group according to the lottery value may be alternatively activated.

  In this way, the conditional effect control unit 432G is a symbol form in which the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display unit 111 executes effect control related to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state. Since it has the symbol mode determining means 439 for determining whether or not there is, it is determined by determining the symbol mode conditions by the symbol mode determining means 439 whether or not the presentation control relating to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is executed. Can increase the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 432H
Next, as shown in FIG. 152, the conditional effect control means 432H determines whether or not the accumulated number counted by the accumulated number counting means 69 is the accumulation number for performing the effect control relating to the presence / absence of the accumulated profit state. The storage number determination means 440 for determining whether or not, the display control means 442 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the accumulated number determination means 440, “total accumulated number ≧ 5” is set as a production accumulated number on the manufacturer side. Therefore, since the game is started by the player and the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 is counted by the accumulated number counting means 69, the fluctuation of the special symbol is started every minute time. When the current total accumulated number is determined to be produced by the accumulated number determining unit 440 only when the total accumulated number is set to “5”, the accumulated number is accumulated by the display control unit 442. An effect display (see FIGS. 194 and 195) regarding the presence or absence of the profit state is performed on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  Here, when performing an effect relating to the presence or absence of the accumulated profit state at every minute time or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, even if the effect display of the same content is performed regardless of the type of the profit state already accumulated Good. Or, depending on the type of profit state that has already been accumulated, that is, depending on the type of profit state that is being accumulated and is next released, or depending on the type of profit state that has been accumulated last The content to be displayed may be different. However, when the current total number of accumulation is “less than 5” at every minute time or at the start of the variation of the special symbol, no effect relating to the presence / absence of accumulation of profit status is performed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the accumulation number determination unit 440 sets a dedicated accumulation number for determining whether or not an effect relating to the presence / absence of accumulation is performed for each type of profit state as the effect accumulation number. You may make it do. In this case, for example, only when the number of accumulated big hit states is “2 or more” at every minute time or at the start of special symbol variation, the presentation of contents representing the big hit state is performed, and the small hit state Only when the accumulated number of “3” is “3 or more”, an effect of content representing accumulation of the small hit state is performed.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional effect control unit 432H determines whether the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is the accumulated profit state or not. Storage number determination means 440 for determining whether or not the production control is performed for the production control. Therefore, the accumulation number judgment means 440 stores whether or not the production control for presence / absence of the accumulated profit state is executed. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Accumulation type effect control means 450 (see FIGS. 153 to 161).
The accumulation type effect control means 450 performs effect control regarding the type of profit state accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, and as shown in FIG. 153, the effect control regarding the accumulated profit state type is unconditional. And an unconditional effect control means 451 that executes the process and a conditional effect control means 452 that conditionally executes the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state.

  As described above, when the accumulation type effect control means 450 includes the unconditional effect control means 451 that unconditionally executes the effect control related to the type of profit state accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, this unconditional effect. By the control means 451, the production control relating to the type of the profit state accumulated can be surely executed unconditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Further, when the accumulation type effect control means 450 includes conditional effect control means 452 that conditionally executes effect control related to the type of profit state accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, this conditional effect control means 450. By 452, effect control regarding the type of accumulated profit state can be executed conditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Next, the conditional effect control means 452 includes any one of the eight kinds of conditional effect control means 452A to 452H shown in FIGS. 154 to 161 (452A to 452H), which will be described in order. To do.

Conditional effect control means 452A
As shown in FIG. 154, the first conditional effect control means 452A is an effect lottery means 453 that draws whether or not effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state is executed, an effect determination means 461, and display control. Means 462 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 184, in the effect lottery means 453, there are a plurality of winning numerical values for effects such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the variation of the special symbol is started every minute time, the production lottery means 453 extracts any one numerical value from “0 to 299”, and the specified extracted value is stored in any winning numerical value table. Only when the winning value is matched, the effect determining unit 461 determines to perform the effect, so that the display control unit 462 displays the effect on the accumulated profit state on the display unit 110. .

  For example, when the jackpot state is accumulated, as shown in FIG. 196, the message “In jackpot stock !!” is displayed on the display means 110, or the jackpot state and the probability variation state are accumulated. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 197, the message “Don't win and stock is likely to change!” Is displayed on the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the lottery value drawn at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol does not match any winning value in the activated winning value group, the effect on the type of accumulated profit status Is never done.

  In this way, the conditional effect control means 452A has the effect lottery means 453 for drawing whether or not the effect control related to the accumulated profit state type is executed, and therefore executes the effect control related to the accumulated profit state type. Whether or not to do so can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the production lottery means 453, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452B
Next, as shown in FIG. 155, the conditional effect control means 452B determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time counting means 70 is the elapsed time for performing the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state. It includes an elapsed time determination means 454 for determining whether or not, and the display control means 462 described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the elapsed time determining means 454 includes a production time elapsed from the time of power-on "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210",. In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is set to the set elapsed time. Only when it matches any elapsed time of the group, the elapsed time determining means 454 determines to produce an effect, so the display control means 462 produces an effect display regarding the type of accumulated profit state (FIG. 196, FIG. 196). (See FIG. 197) is performed in the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time of the enabled elapsed time group at every minute time or at the start of the special symbol variation, an effect relating to the type of accumulation of profit status is given. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,...

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for presentation shown in FIG. 185 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional effect control means 452B executes the effect control on the type of profit state accumulated by the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70. Since the elapsed time determination means 454 for determining whether or not the elapsed time is to be performed, the elapsed time condition is determined by the elapsed time determination means 454 to determine whether or not the effect control relating to the type of accumulated profit state is to be executed. It can be decided and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452C
Next, as shown in FIG. 156, the conditional effect control means 452 </ b> C uses the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means 71 as the number of shot balls for executing the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state. It has a firing ball number determining means 455 for determining whether or not there is, the display control means 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of shot balls for production from the time of power activation is “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current shot ball by the shot ball number counting means 71 Only when the count value of the number matches the number of shot balls in the set number of shot balls group, it is determined by the shot ball number determining means 455 to produce the effect. An effect display (see FIGS. 196 and 197) regarding the type of accumulated profit state is performed on the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current number of fired balls does not match any of the number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that has been activated at the very short time or when the special symbol starts to change, the type of accumulation of profit status There will be no directing. Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the firing ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of production launch balls shown in FIG. 186 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Thus, it is provided with the number-of-balls counting means 71 that counts the number of balls of game balls, and the conditional effect control means 452C is a profit state in which the number of balls shot by the number-of-balls counting means 71 is stored. Since it has the firing ball number determination means 455 for determining whether or not it is the number of shot balls for executing the effect control relating to the type of the game, it is determined whether or not the effect control relating to the type of the accumulated profit state is to be executed. The number of shot balls can be determined and determined by the means 455, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452D
Next, as shown in FIG. 157, the conditional effect control unit 452D performs the effect control related to the type of profit state in which the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting unit 83 is accumulated. The first reserved ball number determining means 456 for determining whether or not the number of held balls is to be executed, the display control means 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187, in the first reserved ball number determination means 456, “4 or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the first reserved ball number for the special symbol. Only when the first reserved ball number of the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since the first reserved ball number determining unit 456 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 462 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 196 and 197) regarding the type of accumulated profit state.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current number of first reserved balls is “less than four” at every minute time or at the time of starting the change of the special symbol, the effect relating to the type of accumulation of the profit state is not performed.

  As described above, the game includes a first holding ball number counting unit 83 that counts the number of the first reserved balls that are the game balls won in the special symbol starting unit 24 and hold the variable symbol display for the game balls. The attached effect control means 452D determines whether or not the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is the reserved ball number for performing the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state. Since it has the 1st reservation ball number determination means 456 to determine, the 1st reservation ball number determination means 456 determines the 1st reservation ball number condition whether to perform production control regarding the kind of accumulated profit state. Can be determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452E
Next, as shown in FIG. 158, the conditional effect control means 452E provides the effect control related to the type of profit state in which the second reserved ball count relating to the normal symbol counted by the second reserved ball count counting means 84 is accumulated. The second holding ball number determining means 457 for determining whether or not the holding ball number is to be executed, the display control means 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 188, in the second reserved ball number determination means 457, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the second reserved ball number for the normal symbol. Only when the number of second reserved balls in the second reserved ball number counting means 84 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since the second reserved ball number determining means 457 determines to produce an effect, the display control means 462 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 196 and 197) on the accumulated profit state on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current number of second reserved balls is “less than four” at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect relating to the accumulation type of the profit state is not performed.

  As described above, the normal symbol starting means 23, the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23, and the normal symbol starting means. 23, a second holding ball number counting means 84 for counting the number of second holding balls that hold the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for the gaming ball, and the conditional effect control means 452E The second reserved ball number determination for determining whether or not the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the two reserved ball number counting means 84 is the reserved ball number for performing the effect control relating to the type of the accumulated profit state. Since it has the means 457, it can be determined by determining the second reserved ball number condition by the second reserved ball number determining means 457, whether or not the production control relating to the type of the accumulated profit state is executed. Interest is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452F
Next, as shown in FIG. 159, the conditional effect control unit 452F determines whether or not the number of changes counted by the change number counting unit 72 is the number of times of changing the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state. The variation number determination means 458 for determining whether or not, the display control means 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the variation count determination means 458 includes a plurality of production variations such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  Each time the game is started by the player and the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the fluctuation of the special symbol changes every minute time. At the start, the variation number determination unit 458 determines to produce an effect only when the current variation number by the variation number counting unit 72 matches any variation number in the set variation number group. Therefore, the display control means 462 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 196 and 197) on the type of the accumulated profit state on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current variation count does not match any variation count in the variation count group that is enabled at every minute time or at the start of special symbol variation, there is an effect related to the type of profit state accumulation. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is randomly drawn at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of variations for performance shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of variations since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Further, the tabulated number of performance changes shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of times of change since the end of the jackpot state generated by a specific symbol pattern set in advance. The specific symbol form in this case may be pre-validated by the manufacturer, and can be set according to the player's preference by the player during any game or special symbol variation. Also good.

  In this way, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional effect control means 452F is an effect related to the type of profit state in which the number of fluctuations counted by the variation number counting means 72 is accumulated. Since the variation number determination unit 458 for determining whether or not the number of variations is to be executed is included, whether or not the production control relating to the type of the accumulated profit state is performed is determined by the variation number determination unit 458 of the first symbol. The change frequency condition can be determined and determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 452G
Next, as shown in FIG. 160, the conditional effect control means 452G provides the effect control related to the type of profit state in which the changed stop symbol (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display means 111 is accumulated. It includes a symbol form determining unit 459 for determining whether or not the symbol form is to be executed, the display control unit 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 459 has "1,1,1", "3,3,3", "5,5,5" as the effect jackpot symbol pattern. , “7,7,7” and “9,9,9” are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, since the game by the player is started and the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state is generated is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the variation of the special symbol is started every minute time or Only when the last jackpot symbol mode stored in the mode storage unit 75, or the previous jackpot symbol mode three or more times before, matches any one of the effect jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. 190 (a). Since the display control unit 462 determines that the production is to be performed by 459, the display unit 110 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 196 and 197) regarding the accumulated profit state type.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, regarding the type of accumulation of profit status, if the jackpot symbol pattern at the previous time, two times before or at least three times before the start of the variation of the special symbol at every minute or when the special symbol pattern does not match any of the jackpot symbol patterns for production There will be no directing. By the way, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a plurality of types (for example, five types) of effect jackpot symbol pattern groups are provided, and at the start of the variation of the special symbol every minute time, Arbitrary one numerical value may be lottery internally, and any jackpot symbol pattern group according to the lottery value may be alternatively activated.

  As described above, the conditional effect control means 452G is a symbol mode in which the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display means 111 executes effect control related to the type of profit state accumulated. Since it has the symbol mode determination means 459 for determining whether or not there is, it is determined by determining the symbol mode condition by the symbol mode determination means 459 whether or not the presentation control relating to the type of the accumulated profit state is executed. Can increase the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 452H
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, the conditional effect control unit 452H determines whether or not the accumulated number counted by the accumulated number counting unit 69 is the accumulation number for performing the effect control related to the type of accumulated profit state. The storage number determination means 460 for determining whether or not, the display control means 462 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the accumulated number determination means 460, “total accumulated number ≧ 5” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulated number for production. Therefore, since the game is started by the player and the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 is counted by the accumulated number counting means 69, the fluctuation of the special symbol is started every minute time. When the current total accumulated number is determined to be produced by the accumulated number determining unit 460 only when the set total accumulated number ≧ 5, the display control unit 462 accumulates the current accumulated number. An effect display relating to the type of profit state (see FIGS. 196 and 197) is performed on the display means 110.

  Here, when performing an effect related to the type of accumulated profit state at every minute time or at the start of fluctuation of a special symbol, even if it is an effect display of the same content regardless of the type of profit state already accumulated Good. Or, depending on the type of profit state that has already been accumulated, that is, depending on the type of profit state that is being accumulated and is next released, or depending on the type of profit state that has been accumulated last The content to be displayed may be different.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current total number of accumulation is “less than 5” at every minute time or at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the effect relating to the type of accumulation of profit state is not performed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the accumulation number determination means 460 sets a dedicated accumulation number for determining whether or not to produce an effect relating to the accumulation type for each type of profit state as the effect accumulation number. You may make it do. In this case, for example, only when the number of accumulated big hit states is “2 or more” at every minute time or at the start of special symbol variation, the presentation of contents representing the big hit state is performed, and the small hit state Only when the accumulated number of “3” is “3 or more”, an effect of content representing accumulation of the small hit state is performed.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 that counts the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional effect control unit 452H is configured such that the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is the kind of accumulated profit state. Storage number determination means 460 for determining whether or not the production control is performed for the production control. Therefore, the accumulation number determination means 460 stores whether or not the production control for the type of the profit state is to be executed. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Accumulated number effect control means 470 (see FIGS. 162 to 170).
The accumulated number effect control means 470 performs effect control relating to the number of profit states accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66. As shown in FIG. 162, the effect control relating to the number of accumulated profit states is unconditional. And an unconditional effect control means 471 that executes the process and a conditional effect control means 472 that conditionally executes the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states.

  As described above, when the accumulated number effect control means 470 includes the unconditional effect control means 471 that unconditionally executes the effect control relating to the number of profit states accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, this unconditional effect. By the control means 471, the effect control regarding the number of accumulated profit states can be surely executed unconditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Further, when the accumulated number effect control means 470 includes conditional effect control means 472 that conditionally executes effect control related to the number of profit states accumulated by the profit state accumulation means 66, this conditional effect control means. By 472, it is possible to conditionally execute the production control relating to the number of accumulated profit states, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Next, the conditional effect control means 472 is composed of any one of the eight kinds of conditional effect control means 472A to 472H shown in FIGS. 163 to 170 (472A to 472H), which will be described in order. To do.

Conditional effect control means 472A
As shown in FIG. 163, the first conditional effect control means 472A is an effect lottery means 473 that draws whether or not effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states is executed, an effect determination means 481, and display control. Means 482 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 184, in the effect lottery means 473, a plurality of winning values for effect are “1-15”, “30-45”,..., “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  When the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, the production lottery means 473 extracts any one numerical value from “0 to 299”, and the specified extracted value is stored in any of the winning numerical value tables. Only when the winning value is met, the effect determining unit 481 determines to perform the effect, and therefore the display control unit 482 displays the effect on the number of accumulated profit states on the display unit 110. .

  For example, when the total accumulated number of profit states is 3, as shown in FIG. 198, the message “As stock number, stock number is“ 3 ”” is displayed on the display means 110, or two jackpots When the state and the three probability fluctuation states are accumulated, as shown in FIG. 199, the message “Large hit as“ the number of stocks ”··“ 2 ”, probability change ··“ 3 ”” is displayed on the display means 110 Is done. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the lottery value drawn at every minute time or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol does not match any winning value in the activated winning value group, the effect related to the number of accumulated profit states Is never done.

  As described above, the conditional effect control means 472A has the effect lottery means 473 for drawing whether or not the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states is executed, and therefore executes the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. Whether or not to do so can be determined by determining lottery conditions by the production lottery means 473, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472B
Next, as shown in FIG. 164, the conditional effect control unit 472B determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time counting unit 70 is an elapsed time for performing the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. It includes an elapsed time determination means 474 for determining whether or not, and the display control means 482 described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the elapsed time determination means 474 includes a production elapsed time “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”... In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is set to the set elapsed time. Only when it matches any elapsed time of the group, since it is determined that the elapsed time determining means 474 produces an effect, the display control means 482 provides an effect display regarding the number of accumulated profit states (FIG. 198, 199) is performed in the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time of the enabled elapsed time group at every minute time or at the start of the special symbol variation, there is an effect related to the number of accumulated profit states. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Any of the elapsed time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,...

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for presentation shown in FIG. 185 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  As described above, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for measuring the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional effect control means 472B executes the effect control on the number of profit states accumulated by the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70. Since the elapsed time determination means 474 for determining whether or not the elapsed time is to be performed, the elapsed time determination means 474 determines the elapsed time condition to determine whether or not to execute the production control relating to the number of accumulated profit states. It can be decided and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472C
Next, as shown in FIG. 165, the conditional effect control unit 472C is configured such that the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting unit 71 is the number of shot balls for performing effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. It has a firing ball number determining means 475 for determining whether or not there is, the display control means 482 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of shot balls for production from the time of turning on the power is “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and when the change of the special symbol is started every minute time or when the change of the special symbol is started, the current shot ball by the shot ball number counting means 71 Only when the count value of the number matches the number of shot balls in the set shot ball number group, it is determined by the shot ball number determining means 475 to produce the effect, so the display control means 482 An effect display (see FIGS. 198 and 199) regarding the number of accumulated profit states is performed on the display means 110. The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current number of fired balls does not match any of the number of fired balls in the fired ball number group that is activated at the minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, the number of accumulated profit status There will be no directing. Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the firing ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of production launch balls shown in FIG. 186 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the firing ball number counting means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional effect control means 472C is a profit state in which the number of firing balls counted by the firing ball number counting means 71 is stored. Since it has the firing ball number determination means 475 for determining whether or not the number of shot balls is to execute the effect control relating to the number of balls, it is determined whether or not the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states is to be executed. The means for determining the number of shot balls can be determined and determined by the means 475, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472D
Next, as shown in FIG. 166, the conditional effect control unit 472D performs the effect control related to the number of profit states in which the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting unit 83 is stored. The first holding ball number determining means 476 for determining whether or not the holding ball number is to be executed, the above-described display control means 482 and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187, in the first reserved ball number determination means 476, “4 or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the first reserved ball number for the special symbol. Only when the first reserved ball number of the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since the first reserved ball number determining unit 476 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 482 performs an effect display regarding the number of accumulated profit states (see FIGS. 198 and 199).

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current number of first reserved balls is “less than 4” at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect relating to the number of accumulated profit states is not performed.

  As described above, the game includes a first holding ball number counting unit 83 that counts the number of the first reserved balls that are the game balls won in the special symbol starting unit 24 and hold the variable symbol display for the game balls. The attached effect control means 472D determines whether or not the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting means 83 is the number of reserved balls for performing the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. Since it has the 1st reserved ball number determination means 476 to determine, the 1st reserved ball number determination means 476 determines the first reserved ball number condition to determine whether or not to perform effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. Can be determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472E
Next, the conditional effect control means 472E, as shown in FIG. 167, is the effect control related to the number of profit states accumulated in the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the second reserved ball number counting means 84. Second reserved ball number determining means 477 for determining whether or not the number of held balls is to be executed, the above-described display control means 482 and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 188, in the second reserved ball number determining means 477, “four or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the second reserved ball number for the normal symbol. Only when the number of second reserved balls in the second reserved ball number counting means 84 is “four or more” when the game by the player is started and the change of the special symbol is started every minute time, Since it is determined by the second reserved ball number determining means 477 that the presentation is performed, the display control means 482 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 198 and 199) regarding the number of accumulated profit states on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current number of second reserved balls is “less than four” at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, no effect regarding the accumulated number of profit states is performed.

  As described above, the normal symbol starting means 23, the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23, and the normal symbol starting means. 23, a second holding ball number counting means 84 for counting the number of second holding balls that hold the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for the gaming ball, and the conditional effect control means 472E The second reserved ball number determination for determining whether or not the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the two reserved ball number counting means 84 is the reserved ball number for executing the effect control relating to the number of accumulated profit states. Since it has the means 477, it can be determined by determining the second reserved ball number condition by the second reserved ball number determining means 477 to determine whether or not to execute the production control relating to the number of accumulated profit states. Interest is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472F
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, the conditional effect control unit 472F determines whether or not the number of changes counted by the change number counting unit 72 is the number of times of changing the effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. The variation number determination means 478 for determining whether or not the display control means 482 described above is included.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the variation count determination means 478 includes a plurality of production variation counts from when the power is turned on, such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  Each time the game is started by the player and the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the fluctuation of the special symbol changes every minute time. At the start, the variation number determination unit 478 determines to produce an effect only when the current variation number by the variation number counting unit 72 matches any variation number in the set variation number group. Therefore, the display control unit 482 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 198 and 199) on the number of accumulated profit states on the display unit 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, if the current variation count does not match any variation count in the variation count group that is enabled at every minute time or at the start of the variation of the special symbol, there is an effect related to the number of profit status accumulations. Never done. Here, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is randomly drawn at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, and according to the lottery value. Alternatively, any of the variation number groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of variations for performance shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of variations since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Further, the tabulated number of performance changes shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of times of change since the end of the jackpot state generated by a specific symbol pattern set in advance. The specific design in this case may be set in advance by the manufacturer, or may be configured to be set according to the player's preference by the player during any game or special symbol changes. Good.

  In this manner, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional effect control means 472F is the effect related to the number of profit states in which the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72 is accumulated. Since the variation number determination means 478 for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations for executing the control is included, the variation number determination means 478 determines whether or not the production control relating to the number of accumulated profit states is to be executed. The change frequency condition can be determined and determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 472G
Next, as shown in FIG. 169, the conditional effect control means 472G provides the effect control related to the number of profit states in which the stop symbols after the change (first stop symbols) displayed by the special symbol display means 111 are accumulated. It includes a pattern mode determination unit 479 that determines whether or not it is a symbol mode for executing the display control unit 482 described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 479 includes "1,1,1", "3,3,3", "5,5,5" as the effect jackpot symbol pattern. , “7,7,7” and “9,9,9” are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, since the game by the player is started and the jackpot symbol mode when the jackpot state is generated is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage means 75, when the variation of the special symbol is started every minute time or Only when the last jackpot symbol mode stored in the mode storage unit 75, or the previous jackpot symbol mode three or more times before, matches any one of the effect jackpot symbol patterns shown in FIG. 190 (a). Since it is determined to produce by 479, the display control unit 482 performs presentation display (see FIGS. 198 and 199) regarding the number of accumulated profit states on the display unit 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated.

  However, at the start of the change of the special symbol every minute time or when the jackpot symbol pattern of the previous, previous two times or more than three times does not match any of the jackpot symbol patterns for production, it relates to the number of accumulated profit status There will be no directing. By the way, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a plurality of types (for example, five types) of effect jackpot symbol pattern groups are provided, and at the start of the variation of the special symbol every minute time, Arbitrary one numerical value may be lottery internally, and any jackpot symbol pattern group according to the lottery value may be alternatively activated.

  As described above, the conditional effect control unit 472G is a symbol form in which the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display unit 111 executes effect control related to the number of accumulated profit states. Since it has the symbol mode determination means 479 for determining whether or not there is, it is determined by determining the symbol mode condition by the symbol mode determination means 479 whether or not the presentation control relating to the number of accumulated profit states is to be executed. Can increase the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 472H
Next, as shown in FIG. 170, the conditional effect control unit 472H determines whether or not the accumulated number counted by the accumulated number counting unit 69 is the accumulation number for performing the effect control relating to the number of accumulated profit states. The storage number determination means 480 for determining whether or not, the display control means 482 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the accumulated number determination means 480, “total accumulated number ≧ 5” is set on the manufacturer side as the accumulated number for production. Therefore, since the game is started by the player and the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulating means 66 is counted by the accumulated number counting means 69, the fluctuation of the special symbol is started every minute time. When the current total accumulated number is determined to be produced by the accumulated number determining unit 480 only when the set total accumulated number ≧ 5, the display control unit 482 accumulates the current accumulated number. An effect display relating to the number of profit states (see FIGS. 198 and 199) is performed on the display means 110.

  Here, when performing an effect on the number of accumulated profit states every minute time or at the start of fluctuation of a special symbol, even if an effect display of the same content is performed regardless of the types of profit states already accumulated Good. Or, depending on the type of profit state that has already been accumulated, that is, depending on the type of profit state that is being accumulated and is next released, or depending on the type of profit state that has been accumulated last The content to be displayed may be different.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is accumulated, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current total number of accumulation is “less than 5” at every minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, an effect relating to the number of accumulated profit states is not performed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the accumulation number determination means 480 sets a dedicated accumulation number for determining whether or not an effect relating to the number of accumulations is performed for each type of profit state as the effect accumulation number. You may make it do. In this case, for example, only when the number of accumulated big hit states is “2 or more” at every minute time or at the start of special symbol variation, the presentation of contents representing the big hit state is performed, and the small hit state Only when the accumulated number of “3” is “3 or more”, an effect of content representing accumulation of the small hit state is performed.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting unit 69 for counting the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional effect control unit 472H is configured such that the accumulation number counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69 is the number of accumulated profit states. Storage number determination means 480 for determining whether or not the production control is performed for the production control. Therefore, the accumulation number judgment means 480 stores whether or not the production control for the number of accumulated profit states is executed. The number of conditions can be determined and determined, which increases the fun of the game.

Accumulation cancellation effect control means 490.
As shown in FIG. 134, accumulation cancellation effect control means 490 performs cancellation type effect control means 500 that performs effect control related to the type of profit state when a predetermined accumulation cancellation condition is satisfied, and effect control related to the accumulation cancellation condition. One of the cancellation condition effect control means 520 to be performed and the cancellation notice effect control means 530 that performs effect control related to the notice that the accumulation cancellation means 67 cancels the accumulation and the profit state occurs is provided.

As described above, the accumulation cancellation effect control means 490 includes the cancellation type effect control means 500 that performs effect control related to the type of profit state when a predetermined accumulation cancellation condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to perform some effects related to the type of profit state for which the accumulation is canceled, and to increase the player's expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 171, the release type effect control means 500 includes an unconditional effect control means 501 that unconditionally executes effect control related to the release of accumulation of the profit state by the accumulation release means 67, and a profit state by the accumulation release means 67. Any one of the conditional effect control means 502 that conditionally executes the effect control relating to the accumulation cancellation is provided.

  As described above, when the release type effect control unit 500 includes the unconditional effect control unit 501 that unconditionally executes the effect control relating to the accumulation cancellation of the profit state by the accumulation cancellation unit 67, the unconditional effect control unit 501 The production control relating to the type of profit state to cancel accumulation can be surely executed unconditionally, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, when the cancellation type effect control unit 500 includes the conditional effect control unit 502 that conditionally executes the effect control related to the release of the accumulation of the profit state by the accumulation cancellation unit 67, the conditional effect control unit 502 It is possible to conditionally execute the production control relating to the type of profit state to cancel the accumulation, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

Unconditional effect control means 501
As shown in FIG. 172, the unconditional effect control means 501 is composed of any one of the unconditional effect control means 501A and the unconditional effect control means 501B.

Unconditional effect control means 501A
Regardless of the type of profit state to cancel accumulation, the unconditional effect control means 501A causes the same content to be displayed on the same content effect information storage means 503 for storing the effect information to be effected with the same contents and the display means 110. Display control means 515 and the like are included. In this way, the unconditional effect control means 501A has the same content effect information storage means 503 and the display control means 515 that produce the same contents regardless of the type of profit state to cancel the accumulation. In addition, it is possible to notify the cancellation of the profit state by always producing the same content, and to simplify the production control.

Unconditional effect control means 501B
The unconditional effect control unit 501B stores an accumulation type effect information storage unit 504 that stores effect information corresponding to the type of profit state to be released, and an effect corresponding to the type of profit state to be released from the display unit 110. Display control means 515 and the like for displaying are provided. As described above, the unconditional effect control unit 501B includes the accumulation type effect information storage unit 504 and the display control unit 515 that store the effect information corresponding to the type of profit state to be unaccumulated. By the effect, the type of profit state to be canceled can be notified by the effect.

  Next, the conditional effect control means 502 is composed of any one of the nine kinds (502A to 502I) of the conditional effect control means 502A to 502I shown in FIGS. 173 to 181 and will be described in order. To do.

Conditional effect control means 502A
As shown in FIG. 173, the first conditional effect control unit 502A has a canceled profit state determination unit 505 that determines the type of profit state to be canceled, a display control unit 515, and the like, and the determined profit state is specified. The production control is performed only in the profit state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), the release profit state determination means 505 includes “big hit state”, “small hit state”,... Any one of the profit states can be selectively activated on the maker side, or can be selectively activated by appropriately changing any one on the hall side.

  Therefore, when the player cancels the profit state one after another by the accumulation canceling means 67 while the game is being executed, the type of the specific profit state to be canceled next matches the type of the profit state that has been activated. Only in this case, since the release profit state determination unit 505 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 515 performs an effect display on the display unit 110 to cancel the accumulation.

  For example, when canceling the “big hit” that matches the set “big hit state”, as shown in FIG. 201, the message “Maybe a big hit!” Is displayed on the display means 110, Alternatively, when canceling the “probability variation” that matches the set “probability variation state”, the message “Maybe the probability variation will be!” Is displayed on the display means 110 as shown in FIG. The

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is released, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, When it reaches 20 times, the effect display may be terminated. However, if the type of profit state to be canceled does not match the type of profit state that has been set, the accumulation of profit state is canceled and executed without any effects.

  As described above, the conditional effect control means 502A has the cancel profit state determination means 505 for determining the type of profit state to be canceled, and performs effect control only when the determined profit state is a specific profit state. Since the release profit state determination means 505 performs the effect control only when the type of the profit state to be released is a specific profit state, the interest of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 502B
Next, as shown in FIG. 174, the conditional effect control means 502B is an effect lottery means 506 for drawing whether or not the effect control is executed upon canceling the accumulation of the profit state, an effect determination means 514, and a display control means. 515 etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 184, the effect lottery means 506 has a plurality of effect winning numerical values such as “1-15”, “30-45”,... “270-285”. A table is set in advance as a group, and one of the winning numerical groups can be selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be selectively activated. It has become.

  During the execution of the game by the player, when the accumulation of the profit state is canceled by the accumulation canceling means 67, any one numerical value of “0 to 299” is extracted by the effect lottery means 506, and the specified extracted value Only when the value matches one of the winning numerical values in the winning numerical value table, the effect determining means 514 determines that the effect is to be performed, so the display control means 515 displays the effect display relating to the accumulation cancellation (FIGS. 201 and 202). Reference) is performed in the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated. However, if the lottery value drawn at the time of canceling the accumulation does not match any winning value in the set winning numerical value group, the accumulation of the profit state is canceled, but the effect related to the cancellation of the accumulation is performed. There is no.

  As described above, the conditional effect control means 502A has the effect lottery means 506 for lottering whether or not the effect control is executed when canceling the accumulation of the profit state. Whether or not it is possible to determine the lottery conditions by the production lottery means 506, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 502C
Next, as shown in FIG. 175, the conditional effect control unit 502C determines whether or not the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring unit 70 is an elapsed time for performing the effect control related to the release of the profit state accumulation. An elapsed time determination unit 507 for determining, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like are included.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the elapsed time determining means 507 includes an effect time elapsed from the time of power-on "60 to 90", "120 to 150", "180 to 210",. In this way, a table is set in advance for a plurality of elapsed time groups, and any one of the elapsed time groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is selected as appropriate on the hall side. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game is started by the player, the elapsed time of the game is increased, and when the accumulation of the profit state is canceled by the accumulation canceling means 67, the current elapsed time by the elapsed time measuring means 70 is any of the set elapsed time groups. Only when the elapsed time matches, the elapsed time determining means 507 determines that the effect is to be produced, so that the display control means 515 displays an effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) regarding the accumulation cancellation. Done in The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated.

  However, when canceling the accumulation of profit status, if the current elapsed time does not match any elapsed time in the enabled elapsed time group, the accumulation of profit status is cancelled, but the accumulation of profit status is cancelled. There will be no effects related to release. Here, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when canceling the accumulation of profit status, any one of “0 to 999” is randomly drawn, and any progress corresponding to the lottery value is made. The time groups “60 to 90”, “120 to 150”, “180 to 210”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated elapsed time for presentation shown in FIG. 185 may be an elapsed time from the end of the previous jackpot. In this case, the tabulated elapsed time may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, the elapsed time measuring means 70 for counting the elapsed time is provided, and the conditional effect control means 502C is a process in which the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means 70 executes the effect control relating to the accumulation cancellation of the profit state. Since it has the elapsed time determining means 507 for determining whether or not it is time, it is determined by determining the elapsed time condition by the elapsed time determining means 507 whether or not to perform the effect control relating to the type of profit state to be released from accumulation. Can increase the interest of the game.

Conditional effect control means 502D
Next, as shown in FIG. 176, the conditional effect control unit 502D determines whether the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting unit 71 is the number of shot balls for performing the effect control related to the release of the profit state accumulation. It has a firing ball number determining means 508 for determining whether or not, and the display control means 515 described above.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the number of shot balls for production from the time of turning on the power is set to “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,. A table is set in advance for a number of shot ball groups, and any one of the shot ball groups is selectively activated on the manufacturer side, or any one on the hall side is changed as appropriate. It can be activated as a single unit.

  When the game by the player is started, the number of game balls fired by the player is increased, and when the accumulation release means 67 cancels the accumulation of the profit state, the total number of current fired balls by the shot ball count means 71 is calculated. Only when the numerical value matches one of the number of shot balls in the set number of shot balls, it is determined to produce by the shot ball number determining means 508. Therefore, the display control means 515 determines the profit state. An effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) relating to the accumulation cancellation is performed on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated. However, when canceling the accumulation of profit status, if the current number of fired balls does not match any number of fired balls in the activated ball number group, the accumulation of profit status is canceled, but the profit There is no effect related to the state accumulation cancellation.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), at the time of canceling the accumulation of profit status, any one of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, and any launch corresponding to the lottery value is performed. The ball number groups “200 to 220”, “400 to 420”,... May be alternatively activated. By the way, the tabulated number of production launch balls shown in FIG. 186 may be the number of shot balls from the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the maker side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  In this way, it is provided with the shot ball count means 71 for counting the number of shot balls of the game ball, and the conditional effect control means 502D is configured to cancel the accumulation of the profit state when the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball count means 71 is The number of shot balls determining means 508 that determines whether or not the number of shot balls is to be executed is determined. Therefore, whether or not the effect control related to the type of profit state to be released is to be executed is determined. Thus, the number of shot balls can be determined and determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 502E
Next, as shown in FIG. 177, the conditional effect control unit 502E executes the effect control related to the release of the profit state from the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting unit 83. A first reserved ball number determining unit 509 that determines whether or not the number of held balls is to be determined, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187, in the first reserved ball number determination means 509, “4 or more” is set on the manufacturer side as the first reserved ball number for the special symbol. During the game execution by the player, when the profit release state is released by the accumulation release means 67, the first hold is only applied if the first hold ball count of the first hold ball count means 83 is “4 or more”. Since it is determined by the ball number determination means 509 to produce an effect, the display control means 515 provides an effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) regarding the release of accumulation of the profit state.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated. However, when canceling the accumulation of profit status, if the current number of first reserved balls is “less than four”, the accumulation of profit status will be canceled, but there will be an effect related to the cancellation of accumulation of profit status. Absent.

  As described above, the game includes a first holding ball number counting unit 83 that counts the number of the first reserved balls that are the game balls won in the special symbol starting unit 24 and hold the variable symbol display for the game balls. The attached effect control unit 502E determines whether or not the first reserved ball number related to the special symbol counted by the first reserved ball number counting unit 83 is the reserved ball number for performing the effect control related to the release of accumulation of the profit state. Since the first reserved ball number determining means 509 is provided, it is determined by determining the first reserved ball number condition by the first reserved ball number determining means 509 whether or not to perform the production control relating to the type of profit state to be released from accumulation. Can increase the fun of the game.

Conditional effect control means 502F
Next, as shown in FIG. 178, the conditional effect control unit 502F executes the effect control related to the cancellation of the accumulation of the profit state with the second reserved ball number related to the normal symbol counted by the second reserved ball number counting unit 84. A second reserved ball number determining unit 510 for determining whether or not the number of held balls is to be determined, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 188, in the second reserved ball number determination means 510, “four or more” is set by the manufacturer as the second reserved ball number for the normal symbol. During the execution of the game by the player, when the accumulation state of the profit state is canceled by the accumulation cancellation unit 67, the second reservation is limited only when the second reservation ball number of the second reservation ball number counting unit 84 is “four or more”. Since it is determined by the ball number determining means 510 that the effect is to be produced, the display control means 515 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) on the profit state accumulation cancellation on the display means 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated. However, when the current second reserve ball number is “less than 4” when the profit state is released, the profit state is released, but the production related to the release of the profit state is not performed. Absent.

  As described above, the normal symbol starting means 23, the normal symbol displaying means 112 for displaying the normal symbol so as to be changed and stopped based on the winning of the game ball in the normal symbol starting means 23, and the normal symbol starting means. 23, the second holding ball number counting means 84 for counting the number of the second holding ball that holds the variable symbol display of the normal game ball for the game ball, the conditional effect control means 502F, The second reserved ball number determining means 510 for determining whether or not the second reserved ball number relating to the normal symbol counted by the two reserved ball number counting means 84 is the reserved ball number for performing the effect control relating to the accumulation release of the profit state. Therefore, it can be determined by the second reserved ball number determining means 510 by determining the second reserved ball number condition by the second reserved ball number determining means 510 whether or not the production control relating to the type of profit state to be released is executed. Sex is increased.

Conditional effect control means 502G
Next, as shown in FIG. 179, the conditional effect control unit 502G determines whether or not the number of changes counted by the change number counting unit 72 is the number of times of changing the effect control related to the release of accumulation of the profit state. It has the number-of-changes determination unit 511 for determining, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 189 (a), the variation count determination means 511 has a plurality of production variation counts such as “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,. The table is pre-set in a variation number group, and any one of the variation number groups is selectively enabled on the manufacturer side, or any one is appropriately changed on the hall side. It can be activated.

  While the game is being executed by the player, the special symbol fluctuates every time the game ball wins the special symbol starting means 24, the fluctuation count of the fluctuation count counting means 72 increases, and the accumulation cancellation means 67 cancels the accumulation of the profit state. At this time, since the current variation count by the variation count counting means 72 is determined to be produced by the variation count determination means 511 only when it matches one of the variation counts of the set variation count group, The display control unit 515 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) regarding the profit state accumulation cancellation on the display unit 110.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated.

  However, when canceling the accumulation of profit status, if the current number of fluctuations does not match any of the number of fluctuations in the activated variation count group, the accumulation of profit status is canceled, but the accumulation of profit status is cancelled. There will be no effects related to release. Here, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), when canceling the accumulation of profit state, any one of “0 to 999” is internally lottery, and any number of fluctuations according to the lottery value The groups “50 to 55”, “150 to 160”,... May be alternatively activated.

  By the way, the tabulated number of variations for performance shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of variations since the end of the previous jackpot. The number of shot balls in the table in this case may be alternatively validated on the manufacturer side, or alternatively may be validated alternatively by internal lottery.

  Further, the tabulated number of performance changes shown in FIG. 189 may be the number of times of change since the end of the jackpot state generated by a specific symbol pattern set in advance. The specific design in this case may be set in advance by the manufacturer, or may be configured to be set according to the player's preference by the player during any game or special symbol changes. Good.

  As described above, the variation number counting means 72 for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is provided, and the conditional effect control means 502G performs the effect control regarding the cancellation of the accumulation of the profit state by the variation number counted by the variation number counting means 72. Since the variation number determination unit 511 for determining whether or not the number of variation is to be executed is included, the variation number determination unit 511 determines whether or not to execute the production control relating to the profit state table to be accumulated. The conditions can be determined and determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

Conditional effect control means 502H
Next, as shown in FIG. 180, the conditional effect control unit 502H executes the effect control related to the cancellation of the accumulation of the profit state by the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display unit 111. It includes a design mode determination unit 512 that determines whether or not the design mode is to be performed, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 479 includes "1,1,1", "3,3,3", "5,5,5" as the effect jackpot symbol pattern. , “7,7,7” and “9,9,9” are set by the manufacturer. Here, the symbol pattern storage means 75 sequentially stores the jackpot symbol patterns when the jackpot state has occurred in the past.

  Therefore, since the big win symbol mode when the game is started by the player and the big hit state is generated is sequentially stored in the symbol mode storage unit 75, the symbol mode storage unit is used when the profit release state is released by the accumulation release unit 67. Only when the previous jackpot symbol pattern stored in 75 or the jackpot symbol pattern three or more times before matches one of the jackpot symbol patterns for rendering shown in FIG. 190 (a), the symbol pattern determining means 512 produces the effect. Therefore, the display control unit 515 performs an effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) on the display unit 110 for canceling the accumulation of the profit state.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated.

  However, at the time of canceling the accumulation of profit status, if the previous jackpot pattern or the previous jackpot symbol pattern does not match any of the jackpot symbol patterns for production, the profit status accumulation is canceled, but the profit status There will be no effect related to the release of the storage. By the way, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a plurality of types (for example, five types) of effect jackpot symbol pattern groups are provided, and when canceling the accumulation of profit status, any one numerical value of “1 to 300” is set. May be randomly drawn, and any jackpot symbol pattern group corresponding to the lottery value may alternatively be validated.

  In this way, whether or not the conditional effect control means 502H is a symbol mode in which the stop symbol after the change (first stop symbol) displayed by the special symbol display unit 111 executes effect control related to the release of accumulation of the profit state. Since it has the symbol mode determining means 512 that determines whether or not, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the effect control related to the type of profit state to be released by determining the symbol mode condition by the symbol mode determining unit, The fun of gaming increases.

Conditional effect control means 502I
Next, as shown in FIG. 181, the conditional effect control unit 502I determines whether or not the accumulated number counted by the accumulated number counting unit 69 is the accumulation number for performing the effect control relating to the accumulation cancellation of the profit state. The storage number determination unit 513 for determining, the display control unit 515 described above, and the like are included.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the accumulation number determination means 513, “total accumulation number ≧ 5” is set as the production accumulation number on the manufacturer side. Therefore, since the game by the player is started and the accumulated number of profit states accumulated in the profit state accumulation unit 66 is counted by the accumulation number counting unit 69, the accumulation of the profit state by the accumulation cancellation unit 67 is performed. Only when the current total accumulation number is set to “total accumulation number ≧ 5”, since the accumulation number determination unit 513 determines to produce an effect, the display control unit 515 cancels the accumulation of the profit state. The effect display (see FIGS. 201 and 202) is performed on the display means 110.

  Here, when an effect relating to the release of accumulation of the profit state is performed at the time of canceling the accumulation of the profit state, an effect display of the same content may be performed regardless of the type of the profit state to be released from the accumulation. Or you may make it vary the content produced according to the kind of profit state which cancel | releases accumulation | storage, ie, according to the kind of profit state which cancel | releases accumulation | storage next.

  The effect display in this case may be continued until the next profit state is canceled, or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, , 20 times), the effect display may be terminated. However, at the time of canceling the accumulation of profit state, if the current total accumulation number is less than “5”, the accumulation of the profit state is cancelled, but the effect related to the cancellation of the accumulation of the profit state is not performed.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the accumulation number determination means 513 sets a dedicated accumulation number for determining whether or not an effect relating to accumulation cancellation is performed for each type of profit state as the effect accumulation number. You may do it. In this case, for example, when the accumulation of profit state is canceled by the accumulation canceling means 67, an effect is performed only when the number of accumulated big hits is “2 or more”, and the number of accumulated small hits is “3 or more”. Production is performed only in some cases.

  As described above, the accumulation number counting means 69 for counting the accumulation number of the current profit state is provided, and the conditional effect control means 502I is an effect relating to the cancellation of the profit state accumulation. Since there is a storage number determination means 513 for determining whether or not it is the number of storages for which the control is to be executed, whether or not effect control related to the type of profit state to be released from storage is determined by the storage number determination means 513. Can be determined and determined, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 182, the release condition effect control means 520 includes an unconditional effect control means 521 that unconditionally produces a release condition related to the release of accumulation of the profit state by the accumulation release means 67, and a profit state by the accumulation release means 67. It has any one of the conditional production control means 522 which produces the cancellation conditions related to the accumulation cancellation conditionally.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 203, the unconditional effect control means 521 includes, as release conditions, effect information such as “even number out symbol”, “odd out symbol”, “even jackpot symbol”,. Is stored, and any one of the release conditions can be selectively activated on the maker side, or any one can be appropriately changed on the hall side to be alternatively activated. It can be done.

  Therefore, during a game by the player, at the minute time or at the start of the change of the special symbol, the unconditional effect control means 521 notifies the preset release condition through the display means 110 with the effect unconditionally. To do. Therefore, the player proceeds with the game in accordance with the released release condition. However, the profit state is not always canceled even if the player meets the cancellation condition produced in this way, depending on the game.

  For example, the “even-numbered out symbol” is set on the manufacturer side. In some cases, stock may be released when a message “246” appears as shown in FIG. ! Is displayed on the display means 110. Therefore, the player expects the special symbol to stop at “246”, and the game performance is improved.

  In the conditional effect control means 522, as shown in FIG. 205, a plurality of lotteries are selected for the plurality of release conditions “even-numbered out symbol”, “odd-out out symbol”, “even-numbered jackpot symbol”,. Production information in which values “0 to 49”, “100 to 149”,... Are associated is stored. When a game is started by the player and every minute time or when the change of the special symbol starts, any one numerical value of “0 to 999” is internally drawn, and the lottery value is the internal lottery value. Only in the lottery value range, any one release condition corresponding to the corresponding lottery value is produced by the conditional effect control means 522 via the display means 110.

  As described above, the accumulation cancellation unit 67 is configured to cancel the accumulation of the profit state by the profit state accumulation unit 66 when a predetermined accumulation condition is satisfied, and the accumulation cancellation effect control unit 490 is related to the accumulation cancellation condition. Since the release condition effect control means 520 that performs effect control is provided, this release condition effect control means 520 can perform some effect related to the condition for canceling the accumulation, and can increase the player's expectation.

  The release notice effect control means 530 performs effect control related to the notice that the accumulation release means 67 releases the accumulation and the profit state occurs, and as shown in FIG. 183, any of the two types (530A, 530B) It is composed of one release notice effect control means 530A, 530B.

Release notice effect control means 530A
Cancellation announcement effect control means 530A has accumulation cancellation time effect control means 531 that produces an effect when the accumulation of profit state is canceled. That is, although not shown, the display means 110 displays "Large hit of jackpot is about to be released!"

Release notice effect control means 530B
The cancellation notice effect control means 530B has a pre-accumulation effect control means 532 that performs a notice effect before releasing the accumulation of profit state. That is, a plurality of types of effect information for the notice effect is stored in the pre-accumulation effect control means 532, and the release notice effect control means 530B receives the special symbol a plurality of times than when the profit state is released. Produce notice before it fluctuates.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), a notice effect is performed in which two child lions take a good walk after one parent lion before the special symbol changes. Before the next special symbol change stops, as shown in FIG. 206 (b), a notice effect is performed in which one child lion walks alongside one parent lion. Finally, before the change of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 206 (c), when an effect display in which only one parent lion runs is performed, after the symbol change, “7, 7, Fluctuation is stopped in the special symbol mode of “7”, and the big hit state is released.

  Thus, since the accumulation cancellation effect control means 490 includes the cancellation announcement effect control means 530 that performs the effect control related to the advance notice that the accumulation cancellation means 67 cancels the accumulation and the profit state occurs, the cancellation announcement effect control means 530 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to give a notice effect that the profit state is generated by canceling the accumulation, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  By the way, the display unit 110 corresponding to the production unit is configured by the color liquid crystal display 21 in the embodiment, but the production unit for the production by the production control unit 106 is not shown in the drawing. Or you may make it comprise with a some dot type display. In this case, it is possible to produce an effect effectively by using a simple display at a low price in a dot format.

  Moreover, it may replace with the liquid crystal display 21 and you may comprise with a 1 or several reel type fluctuation | variation display. In this case, it is possible to effectively produce the reel type fluctuation display device with a taste different from that of the display.

  Moreover, it may replace with the liquid crystal display 21 and you may make it comprise with a 1 or several belt type fluctuation | variation display. In this case, using a belt-type fluctuation indicator, it is possible to produce an effect effectively in a manner different from that of a display.

  Here, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications can be added and the present invention can be applied without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to various ball game machines such as an arrangement ball and a sparrow ball game machine using various game media.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a functional block diagram of the control system of the main control means. It is a chart explaining the contents of reservation ball information. It is a graph explaining the structure of a profit state generation means. It is a functional block diagram of a sound / lamp control means, a symbol control means, and a payout control means. It is a block diagram explaining a profit state accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of jackpot storage means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional accumulation | storage means which has in a jackpot accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the jackpot storage means has. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the winning value for accumulation. (a) is a chart of the number of balls for accumulation, (b) is a chart of the number of balls for accumulation, which is associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the number of accumulations for accumulation, and (b) is a chart of the number of accumulations for accumulation associated with the internal lottery values. (a) is a chart of the accumulated elapsed time, and (b) is a chart of the accumulated elapsed time associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of random numbers for storage, (b) is a chart of random numbers for storage, (c) is a chart of random numbers for storage, (d) is a random pattern for storage. It is a figure of a numerical value, (e) is a figure of the design random number value for accumulation | storage which matched the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the number of fluctuations for accumulation, and (b) is the number of fluctuations for accumulation associated with the internal lottery value. It is a chart of the jackpot symbol aspect for accumulation. It is a block diagram of a small hit accumulating means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional accumulation | storage means which has a small hit accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the small hit storage means has. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram of a probability fluctuation | variation and open extension accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional storage means which has in a probability fluctuation | variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of a conditional storage means included in the probability variation and open extension storage means. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram of a probability fluctuation storage means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional storage means which has in a probability fluctuation storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the probability variation storage means has. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram of an open extension accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which has in an open extension storage means. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram of a special symbol variation time shortening storage means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional accumulation | storage means which has in a special symbol variation time shortening accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the special symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram of a normal symbol variation time shortening accumulation means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional accumulation | storage means which has in a normal symbol fluctuation time shortening accumulation | storage means. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional storage means which the normal symbol variation time shortening storage means has. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a block diagram explaining accumulation cancellation means. It is a block diagram of the accumulation cancellation | release lottery means which has in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. It is a block diagram of the number-of-balls determination means which has in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. It is a block diagram of the accumulation | storage number determination means which has in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. It is a block diagram of the elapsed time determination means in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. It is a block diagram of the symbol mode determination means which has in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. It is a block diagram of the fluctuation | variation frequency determination means which has in an accumulation cancellation | release determination means. (a) is a chart of high probability accumulation cancellation winning figures, (b) is a chart of low probability accumulation cancellation winning figures, and is a chart of intermediate probability accumulation cancellation winning figures. (a) is a chart of the number of accumulated release firing balls, and (b) is a chart of the number of accumulated release firing balls associated with an internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the accumulation cancellation accumulation number, and (b) is a chart of the accumulation cancellation accumulation number associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the accumulated cancellation elapsed time, and (b) is a chart of the accumulated cancellation elapsed time associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of an accumulation cancellation symbol pattern, and (b) is a chart of an accumulation cancellation symbol pattern associated with an internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the number of accumulation cancellation fluctuations, and (b) is the number of accumulation cancellation fluctuations associated with the internal lottery value. It is a block diagram explaining 1 step | paragraph lottery means. It is a block diagram explaining a two-stage lottery means. It is a table | surface of the number of balls for cancellation | release which has in a 2 step | paragraph lottery means. It is a chart of the accumulation number for cancellation which has in a two-stage lottery means. It is a table | surface of the elapsed time for cancellation | release which has in a two-stage lottery means. It is a chart of the design pattern for cancellation which has in a two-stage lottery means. It is a table | surface of the frequency | count of change for cancellation | release which has in a two-stage lottery means. It is a block diagram of the jackpot priority release means included in the release content change means. It is a block diagram of the small hit priority cancellation means which has in a cancellation | release content change means. It is a block diagram of the cancellation | release number determination means which the cancellation | release content change means has. It is a block diagram of the cancellation | release type determination means which has in a cancellation | release content change means. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart explaining the memory content in profit state accumulation memory. It is a chart of the number of cancellations which matched lottery probability. It is a block diagram explaining profit state termination means. It is a block diagram of the probability variation end condition setting means included in the profit state end means. It is a block diagram of the open extension end condition setting means included in the profit state end means. It is a block diagram of the special symbol short-time termination condition setting means included in the profit state termination means. It is a block diagram of the normal symbol short time termination condition setting means which has in a profit state termination means. It is a block diagram explaining production control means. It is a block diagram of the production control means at the time of accumulation. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the production control means at the time of accumulation has. It is a block diagram of a storage presence / absence production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation presence / absence production control means has. It is a block diagram of a storage type effect control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulation type production control means has. It is a block diagram of accumulation | storage number effect control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means which the accumulated number production control means has. It is a block diagram of cancellation | release kind production | presentation control means. It is a block diagram of the unconditional effect control means in the release type effect control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of the conditional production control means included in the release type production control means. It is a block diagram of cancellation | release condition effect control means. It is a block diagram of a cancellation | release notice effect control means. It is a chart explaining the winning numerical value for performance. (a) is a chart of the elapsed time for effects, and (b) is a chart of the result time for effects associated with the internal lottery values. (a) is a chart of the number of balls for production, and (b) is a chart of the number of balls for production that are associated with the internal lottery values. It is a chart of the number of first reserved balls for production. It is a chart of the number 2nd reserved balls for production. (a) is a chart of the number of fluctuations for effects, and (b) is a chart of the number of fluctuations for effects associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the effect jackpot symbol pattern, and (b) is a diagram of the effect jackpot symbol pattern associated with the internal lottery value. (a) is a chart of the number of accumulations for production, and (b) is a chart of the number of accumulations set for each type of profit state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect display at the time of big hit state accumulation | storage. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect display at the time of big hit state accumulation | storage. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect display at the time of profit state accumulation | storage. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the effect display at the time of profit state accumulation | storage. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the kind of accumulation profit state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the kind of accumulation profit state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the accumulation number of a profit state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the accumulation number of a profit state. (a) is a chart of profit status names to be canceled, and (b) is a chart of canceled profit status names corresponding to internal lottery values. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the kind of profit state to cancel | release. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding the kind of profit state to cancel | release. It is a table | surface of the cancellation | release conditions of a profit state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production | presentation display regarding cancellation | release conditions. It is a table | surface of the cancellation | release conditions which matched the internal lottery value. (a) is a display example of the first effect display related to the cancellation notice, (b) is a display example of the next effect display, and (c) shows a display example of the effect display when the profit state is canceled. FIG.

Explanation of symbols

1 Pachinko machine (ball game machine)
23 Normal symbol starting means 24 Special symbol starting means 25 Big prize opening means 66 Profit state accumulating means 67 Accumulation releasing means 70 Elapsed time counting means 71 Firing ball counting means 72 Fluctuation count counting means 76 Profit state generating means 78 Probability varying means 78b Probability change means 85 Lottery means 86 Symbol random number lottery means 89a Special symbol change time shortening means 106 Effect control means 111 Special symbol display means (effect means)
112 Normal symbol display means 131 Stochastic variable accumulation means 133 Accumulation cancellation determination means 134 Accumulation cancellation condition setting means 200 Probability fluctuation accumulation means 211 Symbol random number determination means 212 Variation frequency determination means 219 Release content change means 240 Special symbol variation time shortening accumulation means 248 Number of fired ball determination means 250 Elapsed time determination means 320 Pattern mode determination means 330 Fluctuation number determination means 380 Release number determination means 410 Accumulation effect control means 490 Accumulation release effect control means

Claims (1)

The first start port (24), first display means (111) for displaying the first symbol in a predetermined time based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port (24), and the first display In a ball game machine equipped with profit state generating means (76) for generating one or more types of profit states advantageous to the player when the stop symbol after the change of means (111) is in a special symbol form,
Lottery means (85) for lottery whether or not to generate the profit state on condition that a game ball has won the first start opening (24);
Profit state flag setting means (65) for setting one or more kinds of profit state flags for storing the profit state generated by the profit state generation means (76);
When generating a profit state based on the lottery result of the lottery means (85), profit state storage means (66) for temporarily storing the profit state without immediately generating the profit state by the profit state generation means (76) Provided,
The profit state storage means (66) stores the current profit state flag set by the profit state flag setting means (65) in a profit state storage memory in which one or more types of profit state flags are already stored. The storage order changing means (144) for changing the storage order of the current profit status flag from the storage order set in advance,
A ball game machine characterized by that.